Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield

By Amy Porterfield

Listen to a podcast, please open Podcast Republic app. Available on Google Play Store.


Category: Marketing

Open in Apple Podcasts


Open RSS feed


Open Website


Rate for this podcast

Subscribers: 1656
Reviews: 2

Vanessa Ann Miller
 Aug 24, 2020
Thank you Amy for these podcast episodes. I learn something new every time. When I implement your teachings, my business improves!


 Jun 7, 2020

Description

Ever wish you had a business mentor with over a decade of experience whispering success secrets in your ear? That’s exactly what you’ll get when you tune into the top-ranked Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast with your host, 9 to 5er turned CEO of a multi-million dollar business, Amy Porterfield. Her specialty? Breaking down big ideas and strategies into actionable step-by-step processes designed to get you results with a whole lot less stress. Tune in, get inspired, and get ready to discover why hundreds of thousands of online business owners turn to Amy for guidance when it comes to all things online business including digital courses, list building, social media, content, webinars, and so much more. Whether you're a budding entrepreneur, have a comfy side-hustle, or are looking to take your business to the next level, each episode is designed to help you take immediate action on the most important strategies for starting and growing your online business today.

Episode Date
#401: Live Video: Acting Natural & Going Off The Cuff With E! News Celebrities Jason Kennedy & Giuliana Rancic
01:02:29

Go Live On Video With The Confidence Of A Pro

Nothing like the words “live video” to make you break out in a sweat.

I’m talking about the kind of nerves you haven’t experienced since your 8th grade “Under the Sea” dance.

Let’s keep it real, live video is intimidating...especially when you’re just getting started. 

Over the years, I’ve stumbled over words, lost my train of thought, and said the wrong thing at the wrong time more often than I can count.

When it comes to live video? You’ve gotta roll with the punches and get on with the show, my friend.

But what if a mess up happens in front of, oh I don’t know...Rihanna?

Or Elton John...Kim Kardashian...or Adam Lavigne?

My guests on this episode know a thing or two about high stakes on live video.

They’ve become experts in their field at acting natural, going off the cuff, and navigating live video faux pas. 

These EXTRA! special guests are hands down the best in the biz.

Did you guess it?!

I’m sitting down with Jason Kennedy and Giuliana Rancic who you may know from their years and years on E! News. 

Pinch me!

But what you may not know about Jason and Giuliana is that, aside from being experts in front of the camera, they’re also entrepreneurs who have a digital course! 

In this interview, the three of us discuss:

  • The best piece of advice they’ve ever received in their career
  • How to keep things under control when you veer away from the plan
  • How to go off the cuff without getting worked up
  • How to be engaging and ways to show up more naturally on video
  • And my personal favorite, stories about a time when they were most nervous in front of the camera. 

If going live on video is something you currently do inside of your biz -- or you know you need to do more of -- this episode is a can’t miss!

Click to listen and learn from the pros (I know I did!) 

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [01:14] Being on video is a big part of being a digital course creator and a big part of being an online entrepreneur. That doesn't mean it's easy or comfortable. It takes skill and practice, and I have experts Giuliana Rancic and Jason Kennedy here to talk about that.
  • [14:08] When it comes to live video, the more prepared you are the more comfortable you will be. Rehearse and practice!
  • [19:35] Secret tip: Tilt your face, don't just move your eyes when reading a teleprompter! Make subtle movements to the left and right while keeping your eyes forward. 
  • [28:56] One of the most common video mistakes is not acting natural and being yourself. Find what makes you feel comfortable and go with that.
  • [36:54] We learn why you need to be authentic, don't rehearse jokes, and be careful with the level of spray tan you get. 
  • [46:51] Jason's best advice ever received is to not be so hard on himself. Embrace your flaws, traits, gifts, and talents. 
  • [49:13] Giuliana says there are no shortcuts. She realized her dreams because she was a hard worker and was willing to do the work.
  • [59:55] Action steps: Put one of the things you learned today into practice.

 

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 21, 2021
#400: My Favorite Books & A 400th Episode Giveaway
29:58

The books that built my business -- library card not required.

This episode is a celebration for bookworms and those who consider themselves “podcast people” alike. 

I wouldn’t say I’m a bookworm by any stretch of the imagination. (More of an audiobook and podcast girl, myself.)

But I DO know that books have played a major role in the growth of my business...not to mention my growth as an entrepreneur and, well, person. 

And to celebrate this special 400th episode of Online Marketing Made Easy, I’m sharing the top 12 books that have fundamentally shaped how I’ve grown my business, taken care of my mental well-being, and given myself a break from the everyday hustle. 

If you’ve ever wondered, “What books should I be reading as an entrepreneur?” I'm sharing why these books are at the top of my list. 

Including topics, like:

  • Business systems that free up your time to work in your genius zone (or log off early, lace up your sneakers, and hit the trails...whatever the day calls for)
  • Why fear feels so lonely
  • How one of America’s richest self-made women deals with setbacks (and A LOT of them)
  • My most recent exploration: how to achieve more by doing less *praise hands*
  • Saying no to opportunities because of the fear of being in front of people
  • A little something special for my fellow Enneagram 2’s  ;) 
  • How to know if you should keep pushing for something you believe in or keep working towards becoming your own boss or starting your own business
  • The single book that got me to a place where I was finally hitting my goals...and struggling less along the way to achieving those goals

If any of the above made you said, “Gimme that book rec, Amy!”, dive on in, my friend. 

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 14, 2021
#399: A Science-Backed Habit For Anxious Entrepreneurs with Mel Robbins
52:33

Is It Time To Trade In Our Daily Affirmations?

While this episode might not exactly feel like snuggling into a Barefoot Dreams blanket with a hot cup of chai…

...you, my friend, are still in for a feel-good episode….technically speaking. ;) 

Today, I’m sitting down with the leading voice in the personal development and transformational space, Mel Robbins, to talk about anxiety and entrepreneurship.

And we’re getting real. Like, super real. 

If you’ve been around for a while, you know I’m very open about my longtime battle with anxiety and depression -- and I found a kindred spirit in Mel.

YES, Mel’s considered a thought-leader in the personal development industry. 

YES, she’s an international bestselling author, TedX talk celebrity, and creator of the wildly popular “five second rule.” 

But what you might not know about this larger-than-life figure is that Mel lived with anxiety, panic attacks, and untreated childhood trauma for 35 years. 

Mel’s unique vantage point of battling some major mental hurdles while working hard to build a successful business is something any entrepreneur who struggles with anxiety or depression can relate to. 

(Myself included.)

And it’s from that place that she’s sitting down with me today to share some of the most powerful, science backed techniques that you and I, dear listener, can use in our personal and professional life to find our grounding and nip self-doubt in the bud, including:

  • One habit more powerful than all your other habits
  • Why positive self talk is a bunch of bologna (and the science that agrees)
  • Why mantras don’t work alone

PLUS one piece of homework for you that will turn an anxious day around (and won’t take you more than 30 seconds.) 

To the entrepreneur struggling with anxious thoughts, I hope this episode encourages you, equips you, and makes you feel WAY less alone.

Be kind to yourself...you’re doing hard and brave things.

And know that I’m cheering you on every step of the way!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [05:14] Mel’s on a mission to save everyone else the heartache and headaches that she caused herself for 40 plus years. 
  • [07:43] Through our own actions and attitudes we can have a positive impact on any problem or obstacle we face. We have the ability to figure it out. 
  • [11:37] When you feel overwhelmed and hit a wall, there's a moment when you feel like giving up. Raise your hand and high-five yourself. It's neurologically impossible to criticize yourself when you are high-fiving yourself -- it actually creates positive programming in your brain.
  • [22:47] Empower, support, and embrace yourself throughout the day. Having habits that celebrate you will increase your success. Set an intention and seal it with a high-five as you begin each day.
  • [39:06] Mel shares how her first three courses were a flop. If you want to be an entrepreneur, you have to put stuff out there. You won't know what is going to work until you get feedback. 
  • [47:30] The High 5 Challenge is an attempt for Mel to get 5 million people to wake up 5 days in a row and start their day with a high five in the mirror. 
  • [51:37] Action steps: Go to the mirror and give yourself a high-five and share it on Instagram and tag Amy and Mel. Sign up for the challenge and buy the book.

Click here to listen!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 07, 2021
#398: The Uphill Battle Of Being Your Own Boss & How To Keep Moving Forward
40:00

How To Be The Boss During Big Life Changes

“Where you are in your journey, I hope you, too, will keep encountering challenges. It is a blessing to be able to survive them, to be able to keep putting one foot in front of the other -- to be in a position to make the climb up life’s mountain, knowing that the summit still lies ahead. And every experience… is a valuable teacher.” - Oprah Winfrey

On January 1, 2021, I woke up in a new state.

Literally...and mentally, to be honest.

The first six months of 2021 were some of the most challenging months I’ve ever had...and hardly anyone knew.  

I experienced three major life changes back to back, and even though some of those changes were really good...change is still change. 

It knocked the wind out of me and struggled to find my footing.

When it rained, it poured and I was caught with no umbrella...totally exposed. 

Gene-Kelly wasn’t coming to save me.

NOBODY was singing in this rain.

And in this episode, I’m peeling back the curtain and letting you in on these three biiiig changes because I know I’m not unique in this feeling. 

Sharing these raw stories with you isn’t always easy for me, but I think it’s important.

Entrepreneurs, we’re human too.

So here it is.

Your permission to be totally...messily...freely human.

To take up as much space with your process as you need to.

To work through hard things as quickly as you’re able, but as slowly as you need.

And now that I’m 6 months into the year and juuuust about on the other side of my storm, I want to share with you the habits and thought patterns that have made a world of a difference to me as I, an entrepreneur, took on...well, life. 

My friend, if you’ve ever felt like a fraud as a leader or doubted your ability to make an impact because you’re struggling with life circumstances...I recorded every minute of this episode with you in mind.

Click to listen and know that I’m cheering you on every step of the way.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [10:22] Because of my depression, I reverted back to old behaviors and started to eat to calm myself. It affected my work and personal life. I love change, but this one was bigger than I had planned. 
  • [13:22] Having anxiety and depression has helped me to better understand my students who struggle with mental illness. It has allowed me to have more compassion and understand how hard it can be to run a business and get through these things. It's not easy, but I believe it can be done.
  • [21:21] Thoughts create feelings, feelings create actions, and actions create results. I know when I have a certain feeling, it comes from a thought. I'm now focused on moving forward and dealing with my thoughts and feelings in a more positive way.
  • [23:03] If you're dealing with reverting to old habits or struggling with feeling confident in any which way, I know what that feels like. You need to be seen and heard and set an example for those in your audience who also may be struggling with the same insecurities.
  • [26:37] I got a book deal. When I got the deal, things became weird. My head was full of doubt. Before this, I spent four months writing my proposal, and I felt like I was in the flow. After the deal, my progress stalled. I was on the hook and suddenly felt like nothing was good enough.
  • [33:29] When we're more aware of self-sabotage or impostor syndrome, we have a better ability to stop it. Enjoy the good things that come into your life. You deserve them.
  • [34:58] Think of what you've struggled with and then say, "this is normal." We all have our struggles. We can all be empowered and take away the judgment and accept that challenges happen. Keep moving forward and do the next right thing.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 30, 2021
#397: {Live Workshop} Stop Living Scared, & Start Living Fully With Bevin Farrand
01:00:19

How One Woman Turned Her Personal Tragedy Into A Digital Course With A Mission For Good

My student, Bevin Farrand, is setting us ALL straight when it comes to the trips we’re not taking…

...the risks we’ve been avoiding...

...and the life we’re not living. 

You see, after unexpectedly losing her husband and the love of her life, Bevin decided it was time to stop living on the sidelines of her life. 

And she used her own life experience to create a framework that helps hundreds of others exit the sidelines, get in life’s game, and do the damn thing -- whatever that “damn thing” is to them.

Which is how Bevin’s course, Take The Damn Trip, was born. 

(How AMAZING is that course name, by the way?)

In this episode, Bevin is hosting a LIVE workshop for you -- my OMME listener -- that will help you discover your “why”, your “yes”, and how to start living boldly

She’ll also be sharing how she came up with her course idea and what she tweaked to make her same course convert at an even higher rate.

This is one of those episodes where you’ll not only walk away with a notebook full of practical steps for taking your digital course to the next level…

...but with a fire in your belly for all that life has to offer you.

Don’t wait one more minute to start living fully!

The doors to Digital Course Academy are officially open. If you're ready to take the leap and join me on this course creation journey, click the here!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [03:53] Bevin's husband surprised her with a whirlwind trip to France. He passed away five days later. Bevin's life was flipped upside down. 
  • [09:41] She reflected on what she has done differently, and she came up with the DAMN framework. She is all about saying the thing and doing the thing. 
  • [14:11] Bevin explains how she transitioned to focusing on her DAMN framework but was resistant to niching down. Fast forward, niching down has made her over $47,000. 
  • [21:21] The DAMN framework consists of Decide & Declare. A is Attend Your Own Party. M is Moments Not Missed. N is Now is the Time. 
  • [31:20] With the D, we need to get clear on our why and our yes! Knowing your why makes hard times easier. For your yes, ask what you can talk about all day. Why do you want it?
  • [52:04] We never know what's going to happen, so do the thing you want to do. This isn’t a reason to live scared, but instead to live fully!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 23, 2021
#396: Behind-The-Scenes Launch Bloopers From My 13 Years As An Entrepreneur
21:19

Digital Course Fails From a So-Called Professional (*facepalm*)

Aaaah, bloopers.

I love a good blooper in any form -- from America’s Funniest Home Videos to a Kristin Wigg outtake to a “fails” reel on Instagram. 

But today the tables turn and it’s yours truly who’s in the hot seat.

*GULP*

I’ve experienced more blunders than I can count in my 13 years of online business and I’m sharing the best (or maybe worst) of them in this episode.

From blacking out… 

to being blacklisted from Zoom… 

to getting a liiiiittle tipsy on Live video… 

to welcoming students who hadn’t signed up for my course… 

to drenching my team with tequila while live on camera… 

I’ve had enough bloopers to last me a lifetime.

So I want to dedicate this episode to all of you who think that, if you’re going to create and launch a digital course, it all has to go as planned. 

Because these bloopers span from my early digital course days all the way to this year -- yep, 2021 where I, the expert, should have my you-know-what sorted out.

No matter how prepared, professional, or experienced you are -- life’s just a little messy. 

I’ve learned instead that it’s our job as entrepreneurs to try new things and get out of our comfort zones. And yes, every now and then, that means things backfire.

But in the grand scheme of things, we’re the luckiest.

We get to try -- and in the meantime, we gather stories, memories, and a lot of lessons learned. 

And at the end of the day, we’re still standing and our businesses are still okay…even if it isn’t always perfect. 

Despite these bloopers (and some of them are seriously cringe-worthy), I’ve still been able to build a massively successful business.

And you can do the same, my friend.

Also, I want to invite you to my brand new, FREE Masterclass 5 Little-Known Mistakes  *Most * Course Creators Make and What to Do Instead. Let this be your first step (that isn’t as scary as doing a launch) towards creating a successful digital course. 

You can do that by clicking here!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [03:49] Everything doesn't have to be perfect to have a successful launch. Learn how I sprayed everybody with sparkling water and tequila and how laughing can still bring your team together. Even when things go wrong, you're going to be okay!
  • [08:09] Here's a launch where Zoom went down right before the webinar. They had a tech glitch, and our 15 minute before the webinar email had gone out. Emails were flooding in from 1000 of subscribers, and I blacked out. But guess what, we were only five minutes late. Always have a backup plan!
  • [13:56] The reminder email goes out, and it's 15 minutes before we go live. Attendees started receiving a buyer email that said here are your login details. Even with a tech savvy team, we still had a glitch. Life goes on! Tech glitches will not break you.
  • [18:25] Try new things and get out of your comfort zone. You and your business will still be standing at the end of the day even when things don't go perfectly.
  • [00:19:53] Action step: Sign up for the {BEST MASTERCLASS EVER CREATED} 5 Little-Known Mistakes *Most* Course Creators Make (+What to Do Instead).

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 16, 2021
#395: REVEALED: Digital Course Academy Like You’ve Never Seen Before
26:02

An Exclusive Module-by-Module Sneak Peek Into My Signature Program


In all my years of podcasting, I have never done this. I’ve NEVER revealed, detail by detail, what’s inside one of my paid products for my podcast listeners...until now.


In this extra special, first-of-it’s-kind episode, I’m breaking my own rules and taking you inside my signature program, Digital Course Academy. 


I walk you through my 8-figure-producing digital course -- module by module -- and explain exactly how Digital Course Academy helps my students create and launch their profitable digital course.
I’ll be sharing the lessons, topics, modules, tech, and the mindset taught inside the program. Plus, I’m answering ALL your questions about DCA along the way. Including:

  • What is DCA?
  • Who’s right for DCA?
  • What exactly does DCA teach?
  • How long does it take to go through DCA (and when can I expect to have my course up and running?)
  • Does DCA teach me the tech required to make it all happen?
  • What kind of results do DCA students actually see after the program?

To be totally honest, I poured out my heart and soul in this episode.

 
DCA is transformative. I’ve seen it time and time again with my students...I know the power of this program. 


So I hope you enjoy this extra special insider’s view into Digital Course Academy because it’s an absolute joy to share my heart’s work with you! If you’d like a little insider’s look into what DCA is all about, for a limited time, you can get access to a sneak peek of Module 1 for FREE! Get access here!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [02:49] Digital Course Academy or DCA is the most comprehensive program for validating, creating, launching, and selling your digital course. It's a complete package put into seven modules that spans over a course of 10 weeks.
  • [04:52] DCA is best for someone who knows the ideal community they want to serve and has an online presence around it. They also have a skill or expertise or know how to solve a problem.
  • [09:03] You learn how to get clear on your topic, the type of course you should offer, your course name and how much to charge. As well as, how to create content and how to schedule important launch dates! You'll be set up for serious launch success!
  • [11:37] Email lists are a huge part of the course. We teach you how to set everything up and how to engage with your subscribers.  Bonus -- you also get lifetime access and all future updates. 
  • [13:25] Modules include: the seven key decisions, pre-selling and validating, outlining your course, sales page blueprint, creating a profitable webinar, crafting email sequences, and recording your course.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 09, 2021
#394: How To Overcome Feelings Of Unworthiness & Create Entrepreneurial Freedom
23:23

3 Entrepreneurs Kicked Imposter Syndrome To The Curb (And You Can Too)

I LOVE working with aspiring entrepreneurs...the ones still kicking it in the cubicle.

The ones with notepads full of to-do lists and moments of inspiration scribbled down between meetings then stuffed into desk drawers.

The ones juuuust starting out and who have a million and one questions. 

And because I’ve worked with so many for so long...I recognize the questions that throw the brakes on for many, many aspiring entrepreneurs.

That’s right…

…there are questions that each and every aspiring entrepreneur asks that has the potential to put those big dreams on ice and keep your passionate, creative, capable, world-changing toosh in an office chair, working for someone else for waaaay too long.

Questions like…

  • “Who am I to teach something to others?"
  • "Who would pay for what I have to offer?"
  • "Who would want to hear what I have to say?”

(Questions like this are why I do everything that I do.)

Because these questions creep up on every single person who has ever tried something new.

Which means that if every inventor, teacher, business owner, creator, or artist in history believed the voices that told them...

“You knew it -- that seat’s taken. Don’t embarrass yourself, there’s no room for you.”

...then this world would be totally robbed of the bright, vibrant, diverse, and awe-inspiring gifts shared throughout history. 

Which means there’s a place for you and your gifts at the table. 

The world needs what you have to offer, my friend.

And so in this episode, I want to help you push through that self doubt to make big decisions, take big risks, and go to bat for the dreams that you know are possible. 

In fact, I invited 3 successful online entrepreneurs to share exactly how they worked through self doubt and imposter syndrome as they created a business and life that they really, truly love.

And, of course, I share a few behind-the-scenes stories from my own business...because there’s not a single entrepreneur in history who doesn’t battle with imposter syndrome and self doubt on the reg. 

Oh yeah...12 years later? It’s still a struggle. But it does get better.

Self doubt doesn’t have to hold you back from living the big dreams that you have for yourself. 

In fact, sometimes it’s the voice in your head saying, “You can’t” that allows you to say, sometimes for the first time, “Actually, I think I can.”

There’s unspeakable power in that small but mighty statement, my friends. With just those few words, you become unstoppable. 

So settle in, get quiet, and let’s talk about how to flip the script on that -- very normal, very scary, but very much in your control -- voice in your head.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [03:53] Amel Derragui generated $23,000 in revenue on her first launch. 
  • [06:29] She overcame her feelings of unworthiness by leaning on and embracing support. She doesn't think imposter syndrome ever goes away for good, listen to hear how she handles it these days. 
  • [08:48] Rob Green generated $12,000 during the launch of his flash photography digital course. He's now on track to generate over $100,000 in his first year.
  • [09:43] He had self-doubt, but he learned that action is the antidote to fear. When fears crept up, he would focus on taking the next step.
  • [16:07] Masha Goins always dreamt of being an entrepreneur. She struggled with feelings of unworthiness, but went from dreaming to making $38,000 from her digital course in a short time.
  • [17:23] She knew she was destined to be an entrepreneur, but she worried that she was creating a business in an oversaturated market. When feelings of unworthiness show up, she would consume less and create more!
  • [21:33] Action steps: Lean into a supportive community. Action is the antidote for fear. Consume less and create more. Join the free 30-day bootcamp!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 02, 2021
#393: Course Topic Inspiration: 6 Students Share How They Found Theirs
31:23

Worried they won't buy? How to choose your best-selling, gotta-have-it digital course topic. 

The first digital course I ever created was on how to launch a book using social media.

And when I finally launched my first-ever course into the world...it was a huuuuge flop. 

I made a whopping $267 -- and I cried about it. 

In retrospect, I can tell you my fatal flaw. I chose the entirely wrong digital course topic.

Today, I’ve created and launched 8 successful digital courses that have generated over 35 million dollars in 12 years -- all because I finally chose the right digital course topic...one that my audience wanted and got them results.

And I’m here to save you from the heartache I experienced during that first launch.

Because choosing the right digital course topic is foundational to making sure that your audience will buy. 

More specifically, the promise that you make in your digital course must get them the results that will make the most impact. But more on that in a sec...

If you have zero digital course topic ideas... 

...or maybe you have a million topic ideas and couldn’t possibly choose one

...or maybe you’re totally stuck by thoughts like, “Honestly, what would I teach? I’m no expert.”

...this episode is for you. (Click for the episode and some serious course topic inspo!) 

In it, you’ll hear from six of my students, and they’ll break down digital course topics that are working in the online space in real life, how they came up with their course topic, any hiccups they encountered along the way… and so much more. 

Digital course topics like my student Braden’s. 

Braden’s an attorney and tax pro who chose to teach online entrepreneurs how to legally set up their business so they could get back to the things they’re really, really good at. 

The result? A flexible income that allows him to spend the kind of time with his loved ones.

Or Hilary Kreuger who, after years as a stay-at-home mom, created her digital course teaching communication and personal development online. 

5 figures in revenue later, she’s still a busy mom of 4...but now, she’s bringing home the bacon.

You’ll hear about topics ranging from spirituality to marketing to travel and more.

So no matter what industry you’re in, audience you serve, experience you bring to the table, or how “ready” you feel to teach a digital course, this episode is brimming with course topic inspo to get you well on your way to choosing yours.

You’ve got this!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [04:56] Adia Gooden has been a licensed clinical psychologist for ten years. She wanted to help more people and have more impact, so she created the You Are Unconditionally Worthy Course. Adia made over $26,000 on her first launch. 
  • [09:58] Braden Drake is a small business attorney who created Legally Launched. His first launch generated $8,000. He has since made more courses and revenue while being able to spend time with those he loves most.
  • [14:51] Hilary Krueger is a super mom who created a course called Talk Email to Me, and generated over $11,000 in revenue. She came up with the idea for the course when people kept telling her that they loved her emails. 
  • [18:13] Sandra McLemore created the Travel Marketing Revolution digital course, showing travel advisors how to get new clients online. This has allowed her to build a 7-figure business. 
  • [22:46] Scarlett Cochran helps professional women create streams of income to supplement their revenue and achieve financial freedom. She has generated multiple six figures with her courses.
  • [26:08] Anne Marie Pizarrio was a nurse by trade but wanted to make a change. She launched her own holistic practice, and her course about Becoming an Akashic Records Guide and generated $10,000.

Click here to listen!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 26, 2021
#392: One-On-One Coaching Vs. Digital Courses: What’s Best For You?
33:39

The difference between a “one-to-one” and “one-to-many” business model

I live for a good debate.

Journey or Queen?

Blog or podcast?

Seinfeld or Friends?

And while we’re at it...were they really on a break?

But if we’re talking about building an online business or adding a digital asset to your existing business, there’s one debate that comes up over and over again...

Digital course or one-on-one coaching? (Orrrr… can both work in one business?)

AKA which offer is best for you, your clients, or your business? 

And how the heck can you know for sure? (After all, you sure don’t have the time or money to go all-in on the wrong thing.)

Well, with over 12 years of experience in the online world, I want to help you decide once and for all if a digital course or one-on-one coaching is best for you. 

From my recording room straight to your morning walk (or daily commute...however you take your podcasts!) -- I’ll be guiding you through a self-assessment that’s sure to help you identify which offer is best suited to you, your clients, and your business (and life!) goals. 

Here are the questions to consider: 

  • Do you have information, know-how, or a skill set that could be turned into a digital course?
  • Does what you teach have steps or a roadmap of some sort or could it be turned into that? 
  • Could what you teach be taught to more than one person at a time? 
  • Could your area of expertise be taught via video or audio?
  • Do you like doing one-on-one coaching? 

And while, based on my own business, you may think I’m “Team Digital Course” all the way...my answer might just surprise you.

PLUS in this episode, we’ll discuss:

  • The unique way that a digital course serves you and your customers (that you probably haven’t considered yet)
  • The main differences between the two offerings
  • Specific examples of how digital courses and one-on-one coaching work within my students’ real-life business

And if allll of that still leaves you scratching your head, I’ve gone one step farther to make your dream-business-game-plan extra simple.

I created a simple assessment that will take your unique goals, personal experience, and audience, and create an in-depth personalized assessment to give you the answers to this BIG question. CLICK HERE to take the quiz!

That means you can walk away with a decision today and wake up tomorrow with clarity and confidence that your business is moving in the right direction. 

No more debating. 

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [02:40] You can be more selective with one-on-one coaching. A digital course opens up opportunities for people who don't have the time or resources for one-on-one coaching.
  • [06:06] A digital course gives you a much larger reach and ability to make an impact. 
  • [09:08] You can offer just a digital course or multiple digital courses. I do group coaching within my programs, but no paid one-on-one programs. 
  • [13:39] If you currently have a one-on-one coaching business, you already have a roadmap that could lead to a digital course. You already have a system, model, and framework. 
  • [15:46] You could also offer a digital course alongside one-on-one coaching. This is something I used to do!
  • [22:41] Question #1: Do you have information, know-how, or a skill set that can be turned into a digital course?
  • [23:36] Question #2: Does what you teach have steps or a roadmap of some sort? Could it be turned into that?
  • [24:14] Question #3: Could what you teach be taught to more than one person at a time?
  • [27:20] Question #4: Could your area of expertise be taught via video or audio?
  • [28:45] Question #5: Do you enjoy one-on-one coaching?. 
  • [31:05] Action steps: Take my free two-minute quiz to create a personalized path for creating your block-buster selling digital course.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 19, 2021
#391: What Is A Digital Course? The How, What, & Why They're Magic
24:32

The Digital Course Industry Is BOOMING -- Here’s Why

Not many of my friends understand what I do for work. 

Do you ever feel this way?

Even sweet Hobie -- who’s been around my business since the day it started -- can barely wrap his head around how I bring home a paycheck every month.

(He’d probably say “It has something to do with online courses, entrepreneurs...and confetti, somehow.”)

If you’re a digital course creator or you work in the online space, you know exactly what I’m talking about. 

Which is why, in this episode, I’m spelling it out for the rest of the world -- what the heck is a digital course, exactly?

I’m tackling the basics of digital courses, including:

  • What constitutes a digital course? 
  • Are digital courses ever called something else?
  • How can a digital course work within a business?
  • And my favorite -- what does a digital course make possible? (Hint: FREEDOM! Whatever way you take it...time, financial or lifestyle.)

This episode is for those of you who are new to the idea of creating a business online and how a digital course business can allow your business to scale beyond the limitations of one-on-one coaching or consulting. 

This episode is also for us -- digital course creators and business owners -- to share with the people that we love the most. (I’m looking at you, Hobie!)

Because our industry is here to stay -- you literally won’t believe just how much the virtual learning (a.k.a. digital course) industry is worth according to Forbes. 

(I share these figures in the episode… and the future projections will leave you jaw dropped!)

Digital courses aren’t going anywhere anytime soon, so let’s help get the world acquainted -- starting right here with this episode!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [05:41] Digital courses are online educational programs that you work through on an online platform.
  • [07:09] Danira created a digital course on how to make caramel apples and made over $62,000 on her very first launch. 
  • [09:53] Amanda Ferguson launched an etiquette course and converted 91 students for a grand total of over $101,000. 
  • [11:05] Mark Tew launched his digital course and made $108,000 during his 10-day launch. 
  • [13:20] You can use a digital course as a standalone revenue generator for your business. Or, you can offer a digital course as an upsell or down-sell to your one-on-one coaching.
  • [17:30] Digital course platforms include Udemy, Skillshare, MasterClass, and Coursera. These sites take a cut of the profit and offer limited promotion. 
  • [19:08] Use a platform that you have more control over, like Kajabi. You can put your course on Kajabi and offer bonuses and incentives.
  • [22:20] Action: Take the quiz to know where to start.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 16, 2021
#390: Can One Digital Course Really Generate Financial Freedom? With Joy Foster
55:13

How Online Business Owner Joy Foster Made $1 MILLION From ONE Digital Course (And Why One Course > Than Multiple )

What if you offered just ONE product in your business? 

As an online entrepreneur, you most likely have one of two responses...

You either sighed a big sigh of relief. (I don’t have to do 40 things at once!)

Or, I just made you really nervous. (But I HAVE to do 40 things at once!)

Whatever camp you find yourself in, hear me out.

I believe with all my heart that launching one digital course multiple times is the most effective and efficient way to generate significant revenue in your business. 

And that might make you think, “But Amy, if you earn that kind of revenue from one digital course, you must be able to make EVEN MORE from MANY digital courses!

Nooooot exactly. 

In fact, I’ll prove it to you!

In this episode, I sit down with one of my DCA students and online business owner, Joy Foster.

Joy made one million dollars by selling ONE digital course.

Bananas, right?.

And here’s the best part... Joy’s story isn’t that unique. 

Joy runs a social enterprise that helps women learn tech so they can start a business or make a career change. Her business model was like many of my listeners’ -- workshops that were strictly local and in-person.

But after a while, that business model wasn’t financially viable anymore and she knew she needed to find a way to scale.

So how did Joy go from struggling to make ends meet to million dollar status -- with ONE product offer?

Joy’s breaking it ALL down in this episode, including:

  • Her first failed course launch and what exactly didn’t work
  • Why she downsized from multiple course offers to just one (and what that meant for her bottom line)
  • The simple strategy Joy used to take her conversion rate from 1.48% to 15%
  • How she resists “shiny object syndrome” and remains faithful to her one-course model
  • What Joy believes she could have done to reach success sooner 
  • And so much more!

My dear entrepreneur, YES -- You can focus on less in your business and still  achieve more.

So go for it...breathe that big ol’ sigh of relief!

Listen now to kickstart your simplified business model...one that allows the time and freedom for you to be creative in your business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 12, 2021
#389: Impact, Legacy, & Living A Passion-Led Life with Amy McLaren
32:42

How to Shed Self-Doubt, Find Inspiration, and Change Your Life (and the World) for the Better

What kind of legacy do you dream of leaving? 

What kind of impact will you make in this world? 

If you don’t think it’s possible to feel crystal clear on how to take your passions and leverage them into massive purpose, adventure and impact after just one podcast episode ...you’ve never met Amy McLaren.

Amy is a busy mom of two who passionately splits her time between leading LadyStrength (an online community of driven, entrepreneurial women), growing an Airbnb business, and being the hands-on CEO of Village Impact, the charity she and her husband, Stu McLaren, founded more than a decade ago. 

Amy is on a mission to help purpose driven entrepreneurs shed self-doubt, find inspiration, and change their life, their business ...and the world, while they’re at it. 

Just like she has. 

(And friends, I am here for it.

But let me warn you --.Amy is a force to be reckoned with.

Jumping out of planes, riding a motorcycle across Morocco and a rickshaw down the coast of India, driving 7 strangers down the California coast in an RV for 10-days ...that’s business as usual for Amy. 

She doesn’t just talk the talk -- this girl walks the walk.

And in this episode, Amy is breaking down how passion informs both the wildness and the intentional purpose in her life. 

Together, we talk about:

  • The myths of living a passion-filled life (which aren’t what you would expect)
  • How to create more impact and leave a legacy you’re truly proud of
  • Her charity, Village Impact, and how this corner of the world became her life’s work
  • Knowing when you’re called to do something bigger (because timing is everything)
  • and so much more!

This girl and her friendship make my heart burst -- and I have a sense that you’ll walk away from this episode feeling the very same. 

So grab your headphones and click to listen -- just wait 'til you see what’s possible!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [10:31] Amy was a teacher, but she knew she wanted to do more. She was constantly thinking about travel adventures or living overseas. She was held back from changing by fear, but eventually took a leave and never went back. 
  • [13:34] There's a myth that it costs too much money to live a passion-filled life. This isn’t the case and Amy is proof!
  • [14:12] The other myth is that it's too time-consuming to live your passion-filled life. Here’s the truth, you can do something you're passionate about in five minutes a day.
  • [14:42] Your passion doesn't have to be a side hustle. It really can become your full-time income!
  • [15:40] Unlock your passion. Take a step back and draw a passion timeline. Look back at the things you loved and look for a common theme -- be intentional about incorporating passion into your life.
  • [21:08] When following your passion, always come back to yourself and what you feel and believe in your heart. Don't let other people influence your passion or hold you back. 
  • [22:27] If you really want to create more impact, be consistent and find ways to collaborate. Have a clear message and clear action steps.
  • [29:10] Passion to Purpose: A Seven-Step Journey to Shed Self-Doubt, Find Inspiration, and Change Your Life (and the World) for the Better was written to let everyone know that they can use their passion to do small things for good in the world. 
  • [31:09] Action Challenge. Grab a pen and paper and answer these questions:
    •  #1 What are you passionate about? 
    • #2 What impact do you want to make? 
    • #3 What Legacy do you want to leave?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 09, 2021
#388: A Behind-The-Scenes Look Into The Habits Successful Entrepreneurs Live By
25:04

Online Entrepreneurs Tell All: Habits Edition

I hate to admit it...but I’m a little bit nosey.

I looooove getting a glimpse into the private moments and secret thoughts of people that I admire.

I want to know what makes them tick, what makes it all work...and how I can get in on the good stuff!

Well in today’s episode, I did a little bit of snooping...with permission, of course. 

I reached out to a handful of my peers and asked them what their number one habit was for moving the needle forward as an entrepreneur. 

I’m talking about some of the biggest movers and shakers in the online space -- Gabby Bernstein, Neil Patel, Zafira Rajan, Ryan Holtz, Tiffany Lee Bymaster, John Lee Dumas, and Luvvie Ajayi Jones.

I wanted to know what habit actually mattered and made a difference when it came to building their online businesses. 

Because let’s be honest...the point of role models is having something to emulate so you’re not having to reinvent the wheel.

And you know we love keeping it simple around here. 

So click to listen as these incredible leaders share the ONE habit that has made the greatest difference in their journey as an entrepreneur, so that you can take what speaks to your soul and run with it.

Some are personal, some are professional…but all of them are juicy! 

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 05, 2021
#387: 7 Email Copywriting Tips To Convert Subscribers
37:13

What to do when your email list isn’t buying...

I’m not a chef.

If you’ve followed me for a while, you know that PostMates is higher on my speed dial than my sister (and I love my sister!)

But every now and then, on a special occasion, I’ll break out my old 1990’s apron from my single apartment days and cook something for Hobie.

(Okay, maybe by “cooking” I mean preheating the oven and peeling off plastic wrap but it’s totally the thought that counts, right?)

Well, let me tell you about a dark day in our marriage.

I decided that I’d push myself out of my comfort zone, don my apron, pour a glass of white wine, and see if there was any pasta in the pantry that wasn’t past expiration. 

By the time my hunky man was due to arrive home, dinner was ready and I was prepared to accept my well-deserved award.

But time went on… and no Hobie.

Wife confession: I was mad. 

I’d done all this work, tried something new, put myself out of my comfort zone… for nothing. 

Now, Hobie eventually came home and we worked it all out. (I can’t stay mad at that sweet man!)

But today I want to talk to you about the entrepreneurial equivalent...

...I’m talking about shooting your shot, giving it your best...and it kind of just sitting there...getting cold and stale.

Today we’re talking about making a sales pitch to your email list...and getting ZERO sales. 

OOF. 

Especially if your engagement is healthy, this sales offer ghost town can be massively frustrating. 

In today’s episode, I’m going to be sharing exactly how to prepare your next sales offer so your email subscribers are racing to the “Buy” button.

I’m going to take you step by step through your sales promo, including when to email, how many to send, and exactly how to write emails that make a connection first -- then an effortless sale. 

That includes:

  • the type of email campaign you’ll want to do when you’re selling
  • seven copywriting tips you’ll want to include in every sales email you send
  • how to send sales emails with confidence (and why you should never, ever worry about annoying your list) 

In fact, I want to make sales emails so effortless for you that I’ve created a FREE checklist for you to download, so you can be sure that your sales emails are hitting the mark every time. 

So grab your checklist, click here to listen to today’s episode, and get ready to celebrate earning meaningful revenue in your business with just a few emails. 

PS. Looking for my List Building Masterclass? Well, I sure hope you like sharp upticks in your subscriber count. Click below to save your seat for my FREE List Building Masterclass!

I'm in, Amy! Save my spot!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [08:16] Listen to discover and understand what your audience needs, wants, pain points, and desires are. 
  • [12:14] Use this sentence in your emails, "I know you're thinking…” and then fill in the blank. Take what you've learned and insert your ideal communities pain points into the sentence. 
  • [15:01] Take a journey back to where you were before you found your solution. What would the old you need to hear, know, or understand to cross the bridge to become a buyer?
  • [19:45] Highlight the exact words that you want to use in your email text. These words will come from your ideal audience members.
  • [28:00] Make the email all about your subscriber and their wants and needs. 
  • [30:16] Be specific and clear with your CTA - call to action. Leave no room for misunderstanding. 
  • [35:21] Action items: Map out your promo. To help you, download the free resource and start working through it and do the journal prompts!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 29, 2021
#386: Branding Vs. Marketing (& Why It's Important To You) with Ryan Holtz
41:07

Getting Lost Online? Start With Your Branding

Branding can seem like the online marketing equivalent of a Birkin bag...

...you’ve heard of it, you’re not totally sure what it is, but it seems like all of the big names are into it. 

And I’m with you. Branding felt like a “nice to have” and I put it off for many years in my business. 

But Ryan Holtz, my guest for this episode, and I are determined to convince you that branding is one of the greatest gifts you can give your business and your prospective buyers.

I know, I know...bold statement. But we mean it.

And here’s why...

Your business’ brand answers the question, “What makes you different?” when you’re up against a sea of online competitors.

It establishes what you stand for as a business.

It helps your perfect customer find you and instantly know -- without a doubt -- that they belong in your world.

And when they feel like they belong in your world, they stay in your world.

Which is suuuuuper important because, according to stats from Outboard Engine, it’s 5 times more expensive to find a new customer than it is to keep an existing one.

But if you’re anything like me in the early years of my business, you might be thinking…

Is my business too new to be thinking about branding?

Branding sounds nice someday… when I have spare time and a little extra cash.

Well in this episode, Ryan Holtz, renowned speaker, expert marketer, host of a Top 100 Apple Podcast, and a wealth of entrepreneurial knowledge, joins me to debunk those mental-myths and get you started in the right direction.

Ryan shows you step-by-step how to identify what your brand is, what your business stands for, and how these things can help attract like-minded customers that are totally onboard with you, your service, and your mission. 

When you know your brand, you’ll never be unsure of how to show up online again. 

When you’re confident in what your brand stands for, alignment comes naturally. 

And I want that for you with my whole heart.

So press play and let’s chat -- an online presence that you feel proud of (and in total alignment with) awaits!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 22, 2021
#385: Is A Blog Valuable To Your Business? With Glo Atanmo
36:07

Glo Atanmo tells all about creating a passion led business and a blog that adds value to her business.

Sometimes there’s a podcast guest that joins me on Online Marketing Made Easy and they leave me, well… speechless.

Speechless because they live life on their own terms and their adventurous spirit can teach us a thing or two about this entrepreneurial life we might not have considered before. 

Glo Atanmo is one of those people.

Featured in Oprah Magazine, Conde Nast, Essence and more, Glo got her start at 16 when she purchased her first “big girl” domain and taught herself coding basics -- fast forward to today, a decade later, and she’s running a 7-figure business, traveling the world and blogging about it as she goes. 

In this episode we talk about Glo’s tips for using a blog to build a business -- and yes, you definitely need to dust off your blog and get it back up and running -- she also tells the story of how she got her start with just $500 in her pocket, and what you need to know today about succeeding as a multi-passionate entrepreneur.

And if you thought Glo was finished there, you haven’t met this inspirational icon.

Because Glo shares her 5-point framework for building a sustainable business -- and what passion has to do with it.

Hear that, my fiery entrepreneurs? 

Glo is spelling out exactly how much to bank on your passion when starting a sustainable business...and the 4 factors that support your passion to make sure that you’re playing the long game. 

If we’ve piqued your inner travel bug’s interest -- it’s time to hit play and join us! 

This interview was so much fun and I can’t wait for you to hear how it inspires you in your next business adventure.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [04:28] When Glo was 22, she took $500 and booked a one-way ticket to Europe. She shares the scariest thing about this experience and how she had to get scrappy. 
  • [07:59] The biggest lesson she learned was that opportunity will find you if you are available and always find gratitude in each situation. Everything is an opportunity to thrive and grow. 
  • [13:43] Glo has expanded her business into a digital course teaching other bloggers how to land brand deals, which allows her to connect with female bloggers who have a deeper mission. 
  • [23:22] Is blogging still effective? As a writer, Glo shares how she feels blogs fit within a business model. 
  • [27:18] Passion is needed for a sustainable business, but you also need purpose, a promise, to be proficient, and be able to speak to a pain point.
  • [35:12] Action step: Work through Glo’s 5 P’s: passion, purpose, promise, be proficient, and pain point.

Click here to listen!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 15, 2021
#384: Should You Write A Book? With Gabby Bernstein
41:59

Get ready to access behind the scenes tips for book writing success.

If you’re considering writing a book - whether it’s through traditional publishing or self-publishing - this episode is a must listen. 

Grab a kombucha, iced coffee, or your favorite snack, and join me and Gabby as we talk about the steps you need to take when tackling the book writing process.

In this episode we cover a lot of ground around what you need to know including:

  • How to overcome the dreaded writer’s block
  • Ways to think about turning your digital course into a book (it can be done!)
  • How to access her FREE training “4 Secrets To Your Best Selling Book” 

Let me tell you, this conversation was a journey!

Whether book writing has been on your mind for a while, or you’re not sure if it’s the path you want to take -- this episode is the roadmap to help you take the leap and put pen to paper (even if it’s for a blog post only right now.) 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 08, 2021
#383: Am I Giving Away Too Much Free Content?
26:40

And the Not-So-Mysterious Breakdown of Free vs. Paid Content 

Imagine how it would feel to show up to your next content creation sesh with clarity and confidence, knowing exactly what YOUR boundaries are between free and paid content. 

Sounds amazing, right?

Well, I’m going to show you how to finally let go of the white-knuckle fear of sharing your stuff for free.

Because look, I get it.

As an entrepreneur, it’s the ultimate rock and hard place. 

  • Why would my audience ever be willing to buy from me if I’m teaching them concepts for free?
  • How would they ever trust that I know my stuff if I don’t share anything with them until they fork over the cash? 

That’s why I’m taking a page out of the book of my beloved Crime Junkie podcast and getting to the bottom of this great entrepreneurial mystery in this episode -- once and for all. 

In this episode, I’m giving you the down-to-the-decimal details on: 

  • How much free content you should be sharing with your audience (and I’m talking specifics!)
  • 3 questions to ask yourself to make sure that your free stuff isn’t overstepping and undervaluing your paid offers
  • The one thing your free content needs so your audience can say an ENTHUSIASTIC YES to becoming a paying customer
  • The actual free content that I released ahead of my Digital Course Academy launch that prepared my audience for DCA...rather than turn them off of it. 

So grab a notepad and press play! We’ve got a mystery to solve.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [02:31] Free content is the what and of what you're teaching while paid content is the how and step-by-step. 
  • [05:40] A good rule of thumb is that 20% of your paid content can be revealed in your free content. 
  • [13:49] Be generous with your content. Have an abundance mindset and know that there is more than enough to go around.
  • [15:47] Ask yourself these questions when determining what to include in your free content: Do I teach the exact same thing in my course? Where's my audience right now in relation to this exact topic?
  • [24:52] Action steps: Do a mini content audit, and develop an abundance mindset when it comes to free content.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 01, 2021
#382: Step-by-Step Systems To Eliminate Overwhelm & Work Less
43:23

People often ask me, “Amy, what’s the secret to your success?” and I always say that I live and die by systems.

In fact, without systems... I could not have a multimillion-dollar business and still have a life. I could not have a four-day workweek and actually make money if I didn’t have systems.

Forbes recently stated that when you create systems in your business you can save up to two work hours per day... that’s 240 hours a year!

And that’s why today’s episode is so important. Because I want you to imagine what it would feel like to no longer be chasing a never-ending to-do list... and instead feel focused and confident as you create the business of your dreams.

We'll talk about...

  • The virtual filing system I swear by that actually saves me time
  • How I make my project management program work for me, and not the other way around
  • The number one communication tool I adore and the magic of SOPs
  • Three ways to scale your business brilliantly

If you want to know my secrets for going from a constant state of busy business overwhelm to tons of organization, more free time, more money in the bank, and a four-day workweek… you’re in the right place.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [08:35] Want to stay organized? Use a virtual filing system to organize assets in Dropbox and documents in Google Docs. 
  • [17:46] Asana allows you to systemize and get really clear on who's doing what and when it's due. 
  • [23:29] Find out how we use Slack to segment communication by channel and our guidelines, including keeping tasks in project management software. 
  • [28:17] Learn how we have built a blueprint for success using standard operating procedures or SOPs. We have systemized tutorials for any procedure that we do over and over again.
  • [35:18] Three ways to help you scale your business include becoming an affiliate marketer, adding a group coaching program to your product suite, and adding a digital course!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 24, 2021
#381: Perfect Your Price Point & Create Consistent Revenue With Jereshia Hawk
42:42

Fear of charging too much? Yeah… we’re gonna talk about. 

If you're ready to convert more clients and boost your sales processes, this podcast episode is your blueprint. 

Join me as I connect with Jereshia Hawk, business coach, sales expert, and framework phenom when it comes to knowing when to sell, perfecting what to charge, and creating consistent revenue streams.

Jereshia has helped over 350 entrepreneurs double their package prices, convert more sales calls, and increase their revenue growth within 12 months.

Plus, she’s a huge advocate for women of color in leadership positions which is part of her entrepreneurial WHY. 

During our chat, Jereshia talks about the 10 questions to know exactly how much more you should be charging. Questions we should all answer that are simple, straightforward, and get results. 

I had sooooo many questions for Jereshia and I think you’re going to love the takeaways she gives as we go through them all.

Get ready for note taking goodness and tips for *finally* knowing just what to charge for your offer.

Plus, as promised, here’s the script that Jereshia and I mention in the conversation. Make sure you listen so you can take action on this tried and tested process right away.

Go on your Instagram stories, show your face, and say: 'Hey all! I've helped [# OF PEOPLE] get [X RESULTS] in their [TYPE OF BUSINESS]. I'm currently looking to take on a few more clients and have [X SPOTS OPEN]. I would love to go on this journey with you. Are you a [INSERT WHO YOU HELP]? If so, I want to hear from you! Send me a DM and I'll send you more details about this opportunity.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [06:42] Jereshia shares about overcoming the fear of charging too much, and how “charging what you’re worth” isn’t the right way to think. 
  • [15:05] Here’s how to create consistent revenue. For starters, don't bring your employee mindset into your entrepreneurial playground. 
  • [20:01] Guess what, if you’re listening to this, you are ready to sell. Jereshia is a big believer in selling before you build. 
  • [32:19] She even shares tips for direct message selling. She says, “Conversion happens in conversation.” 
  • [36:01] Action tip: Jereshia gives you an actual way to welcome new clients through Instagram stories -- she even gives you a script!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 17, 2021
#380: 4 Strategies To Create A High Converting Sales Page
23:27

Are you ready to boost your sales and crack the code on customer conversions? 

Ask any copywriter about sales pages and they’ll tell you: it takes a lot of tinkering to crack the sales conversion code.

That said, after our last Digital Course Academy launch -- I think we might have actually done it and I’m spilling all the beans about it.

In this podcast episode, you’ll learn exactly what widgets we used and strategies we implemented to keep eyes on the DCA sales page for over 5 minutes.

That’s a lifetime when it comes to viewer stats.

It also means that the sales page is working wonders when it comes to keeping leads engaged.

As an online business owner, I want you to have knowledge about the little things that made a big difference in our latest launch conversions (so you can use them too!) -- things like:

  • A customizable widget that helps potential students, customers, and clients get all of their burning questions answered face to face
  • The one section every sales page needs to help customers feel confident about their purchase (one of my favs!)
  • How video can keep your customers engaged right from the very top of the page and what to include so they can’t help but keep watching, reading, and clicking those buy buttons

I also tell you the #1 simple to implement and most engaging part of the page that you don’t want to miss. Stick around until the end of the episode for that one!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [04:09] We used VideoAsk which is a widget which allows you to have face-to-face video conversations with your customers and ended up with a 33% conversion rate.
  • [08:34] Testimonials was another enticing section. We had three or four on the page and then offered the option of looking through an entire database of customer testimonials broken up by category.
  • [11:39] There was also a sizzle reel at the top of the sales page. This is a short video mashup of audio, video and images that promote your offer, and something you can make on your own!
  • [14:08] Our chat feature was hot on our sales page. This is the little chat bubble that pops up and offers a live chat, which will guarantee higher engagement. 
  • 20:28] Track your metrics. It's the only way to know if all of your sales page efforts are working. Google analytics allows me to see trends. We know if we are growing, improving, and how to pivot. 
  • [22:13] Action steps: Decide which of the above mentioned methods you are going to use and start planning things out. Decide during this week and start scheduling each one. Create a plan for one or two of these strategies and start chipping away at it.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 10, 2021
#379: Cure Writer’s Block: The Content Structure My Team Swears By
16:32

Get ready to tackle the creativity time crunch and discover the little known framework that I use in my business to produce content. 

Let’s be honest: social media, podcasts, newsletters, sales pages and everything else you need to run your business can take a ton of time out of an already busy day. 

Just when you think you’re caught up, your content calendar sends a reminder and you’re back at it again. 

Sometimes it may feel like you’re always “behind” in your business. You’re in good company -- many entrepreneurs just like you are in the same boat.

That’s why in this podcast episode, I tackle the content time crunch so you can start speeding up the production process and start standing out online.

Not only will you get some behind-the-scenes sneak peeks on how we write podcast episodes, social media and more but you’ll also get the inside scoop on:

  • How this framework can be used for anything you’re creating so it’s compelling and creates flow and clarity
  • Ways you might be missing out on consistency and a simple fix to help across all channels
  • Getting past the dreaded writer’s block so you produce assets more quickly (and so it doesn’t take all day)

Get ready to move past that day long content creation process and get into a flow state instead -- this episode is waiting for you. 

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [04:07] Start with the what. This is an overview of the main point or outcome you want your students to achieve. 
  • [06:17] Next, is the why. Explain why this content is important and why it matters to your audience. Build your case for the importance of what you're sharing. 
  • [07:44] Move on to the how. This is a step-by-step on how your audience can apply what you're teaching to their own lives. You're providing them with a road map that leads with a clear intentional flow from start to finish.
  • [10:46] After that, focus on the proof. Show how you apply the how in your own business. These are real time examples or success stories from your customers.
  • [15:32] Action steps: Write out this framework and look at your content and see where you're using the steps. Then start with one piece of content and apply this framework!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 03, 2021
#378: Could A 4-Day Work Week Fit Your Business?
41:45

If you’ve ever thought about how it might look to work less days in your business, check out the experiment my team and I are in the middle of testing.

When I first pitched the shorter work week idea to my leadership team, well… I was met with crickets. The idea of the work week happening only Monday through Thursday felt a bit unattainable.

And while I was really excited about the idea myself, I know the team’s concerns were valid and so we agreed to try it for 90 days as an experiment

Right now we’re 60 days in, and have uncovered some really interesting stuff that I wanted to share with you. 

Since I’m a big believer in going first and showing what’s possible for you, it’s my hope that this episode helps show you what you need to know about the 4-day work week process -- especially if you’ve been thinking about ways to add more time back into your week. 

You’ll also learn more about:

  • WHY a shorter week was something I wanted to implement and how our team why might spark some ideas for you
  • Processes to set into place when it comes to your team, communication, and what the new work week looks like
  • The different categories to create plans for as you look at your day-to-day systems and expectations
  • The 3 MUST ASK questions you need to answer before making the leap and how they’ll help you determine if this is for you

If reading those highlights pulls at your imagination strings and gets you thinking about your own work schedule -- grab your notebook and pen -- because this is definitely a note taking episode.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [02:21] Learn some of the reasons why my team and I have decided to test out doing a 4-day work week. 
  • [06:36] Read the book Shorter: Work Better, Smarter, and Less Here's How.
  • [11:38] Get clear with your team, if you have one, how you want to organize and go about preparing for the 4day work week. What are concerns that come up and how can you troubleshoot them?  
  • [15:05] Sit down and discuss any issues that may come up, and create a guideline document to help guide your team. 
  • [19:44] Find out the tools we use to make our 4-day work week efficient and possible. 
  • [22:33] Set a date and time to meet with your team to see how the experiment is working and how you can improve or pivot.
  • [36:59] Action Steps: How will this professionally benefit you? How will this personally benefit you? What will it mean if you don't move to a four-day work week? Get clear on these answers, start with step one, and read the book Shorter.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 27, 2021
#377: How To Re-engage Your Email List
23:09

It’s never too late to hit send and connect with your subscribers again.

If your email list has been on your mind (maybe a little more time has passed than you’d like to admit since you’ve last landed in their inbox) and you know it’s time to hit ‘send’ but you’re afraid that you’ll be met with crickets and unsubscribes -- today’s episode is just what you need to gain back your confidence.

Here’s the thing, when it comes to engaging with your email list after a long absence, there are a few simple things you can put into place to make a seamless re-entry.

But first, I have to tell you: you’re not alone.

Life happens and sometimes we have to hit pause on our regular systems and processes. I get soooo many questions about this topic -- so, it’s time we talk about it. 

In today’s episode, I’m going to walk you through how to organize and put together a re-engagement campaign, including how many emails to send, how far apart, and what to include in each email.

You’ll also learn everything you need to know to successfully hit send with confidence and:

  • Know exactly what to say so your audience feels supported and seen
  • Have a plan on how many emails you need to send and help them remember why they signed up in the first place
  • Create a free gift that they need so badly they’ll be thanking you a million times over in their replies
  • Craft a plan to write emails they look forward to opening week in and week out

It’s time to make a plan because your subscribers are waiting for you.

If you’re ready to get back on track and into the hearts and inboxes of your audience, click below to get started.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [03:31] It's easier to reignite an old list than it is to start from scratch. In fact, getting a new customer can cost five times more than re-engaging with an old customer.
  • [06:10] If you’ve taken some time away from your email list, it’s time to create a re-engagement campaign. 
  • [07:40] Email #1: Reintroduce yourself, but then make it all about how you are serving your audience. 
  • [12:07] Email #2: Continue to nurture your list and show them how you're going to help them achieve their goal and desire, and why you're the person to do so. 
  • [14:37] Email #3: Ask what they need and ask them to reply directly to your email. This shows you care and are committed to serving them. 
  • [16:01] Rules: Make sure your subject lines stand out. Commit to showing up consistently. Set time aside and batch your email content.
  • [21:02] Give it at least 60 days before you begin to sell. This is all part of the know, like, and trust equation.
  • [21:53] Action steps: Within the next week sit down and write out your re-engagement campaign. Then give yourself at least a week to write out the emails, and finally send them. Enjoy the process!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

May 20, 2021
#376: Your Beginner Guide To Going Evergreen: Here’s Where To Start
25:17

The dream of setting your digital course on autopilot and letting it roll (with minimal effort) is a popular one for most entrepreneurs.

This is why I’m sharing the success roadmap for scaling I use so you can plan your strategy successfully.

And while I do believe going evergreen at the right time can be a beneficial way to grow your business, I'm also a firm believer that becoming an expert at live launching first is a must.

On this week’s podcast episode, I’m not only talking about the benefits of evergreen, I’m walking you through ways that live launches can prepare you for creating an evergreen product. You’ll also see how I (and some of my students) have done it in the past. 

Having a clear direction in the process of going evergreen is the fastest way to help you on your journey and when you listen to this episode, you’ll learn:

  • The core values you must know before even thinking about getting started
  • Platforms you’ll want as your best friends so the funnel runs without a hitch
  • What must-have content should be created as you think about launching  
  • How timing and LIVE launching plays into creating your evergreen experience

Plus, when you listen, you’ll have access to a FREE resource you can use as you get started and take action on the path to evergreen products.

Join me as I walk you through the step-by-step plan to help get you ready to generate income that feels effortless. 

Here’s a preview of the episode: 

  • [04:44] Do at least two or three live launches before you go evergreen. Live launching makes you more nimble and a better marketer.
  • [09:34] Platforms you'll need to go evergreen. ConvertKit - for emails and creating landing pages. Demio - for webinars. Deadline Funnel allows you to create smart links with individual automated campaigns. 
  • [13:01] Marketing content you need includes: a webinar-registration page, sales page, email campaign to guide and nurture, and a re-play email.
  • [18:01] Create urgency by using Deadline Funnels and irresistible bonuses. 
  • [20:01] Nicole Calloway Rankins went evergreen after two live launches and heard crickets. She went back and did a few more live launches and then launched an evergreen course that generates revenue every single month.
  • [21:41] Christina Galbato has two evergreen courses that have made over one million dollars in the past year. She says to make sure your live launch, webinar opt-in rate, show-up rate, sales conversions, and post-webinar email-open rate are all solid before moving on to evergreen.
  • [23:33] Action steps: Live launch until you see consistent results. Update your live launching marketing material. Start setting up your platforms. Pay close attention to your show up and conversion rates.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 13, 2021
#375: How To Get Noticed Online (& What Jumping Out Of A Plane Has To Do With Entrepreneurship)
31:07

Content creation, visibility in your business, and how life will steer you in the right direction (whether you’re ready for it or not!)

New York Times Best-selling author, award-winning blogger, and “professional troublemaker,” Luvvie Ajayi Jones is here and she’s ready to help you take action on your big dreams, move through the fear that’s holding you back, and use your voice to support your audience.

I loved my interview with Luvvie, and I know you will too. We chat about...

  • How her skydiving experience helped her become comfortable with being uncomfortable
  • Why content creation and getting noticed online looks different than you think 
  • The reason getting a “D” in college was the sign she needed to say goodbye to her dream of becoming a doctor and start a blog instead

There are so many "a-ha", "WOW", and jaw-dropping moments in this episode, I wish I could name them all... you’ll just have to join us over on the podcast to find out what they are.

Sometimes a conversation just takes on a life of its own and reveals a lot of wisdom. I know when Luvvie says, “When you serve people, you will be seen by the people you need to serve,” you’ll want to stop multi-tasking and make sure you’re listening to the conversation that follows.

You’re in for a real treat, friend! Listen in to get inspired, excited, and driven to take action with Luvvie’s step-by-step guidance.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 06, 2021
#374: Take Your Hands Off The Wheel: Automation For The Smart Business Owner
19:17

Creating automation in your business can help you streamline your tasks and save time every single day.

Whether you’re a business owner just starting out or a seasoned entrepreneur, building automation systems in your business is key to helping you delegate and create processes that will help you succeed. 

The bonus? When you create automation in your business you’ll also have the flexibility in your schedule you’ve always dreamed of. 

I know, I know, you might be thinking, “But Amy -- this sounds too good to be true!”

And while it may seem like a miracle for your business, I can assure you that with just a little patience and follow through with the step-by-step process I give you, automation will be yours! 

In this episode you’re about to learn my favorite tips and tools to create:

  • Auto-responders in your emails for all the FAQs that land in your inbox
  • Seamless scheduling systems (no more headaches!) 
  • Social media content creation so you can batch and post with ease
  • Standard operating procedures -- every job now has a “how to do this” list
  • A process for hiring a Virtual Assistant to provide ongoing help

 

Plus, just to make things interesting, I have a fun accountability challenge at the end and I want to make sure I’m cheering you on as you implement your automation so you can spend more time on all the things you love!

Here’s a preview of the episode: 

  • [04:18] Automation saves you time, money, and precious energy. It eliminates human error and allows you, and your team to focus on the big picture. 
  • [05:41] Email automation. Only check your email once a day and set up an autoresponder for the other times. 
  • [07:31] Create guided responses for common email questions that you get. You can still add a personal touch. You can use Boomerang to mark your email to go away and come back on another day.
  • [09:33] Scheduling automation. Schedulicity is an online calendar that you can integrate with your calendar and create a personalized link with your availability.
  • [10:59] Automating social media and weekly content. A social media automating tool will allow you to plan out your social media all at once. 
  • [13:20] Managing emails from your community. ConvertKit is a good solution if you're just getting started. 
  • [15:24] Standard operating procedures or SOPs. These documents will save you a lot of headaches down the road when you hire and scale your team. 
  • [17:27] Compile tasks that can be passed off to a professional VA, even if it's just for a few hours a week. This will allow you to stay in your zone of genius.
  • [18:35] Action steps: Decide on one automation step that you can set up within the next 7 days. Send me a DM and tell me about it!

 

Apr 29, 2021
#373: Quiz Creation 101: Everything You Need to Know About Using the Most Effective Lead Magnet
41:09

Are you ready to scale your business lightyears ahead with an online quiz? You’ll be so glad when you do. 

This week, I have quiz building expert, Chanti Zak, on the show. 

Chanti’s the perfect person to show you what to do next when it comes to creating your online quiz -- she’s SO good she’s even written quizzes for me!

If you’re excited about this, get ready to dive in, my friend, because I believe a million percent that this episode is just what you need to get started.

During our time together, Chanti walks us through everything you need to know about:

  • How to select the PERFECT topic so your audience can’t wait to see their results
  • How to layout your results so they are fun and informative 
  • And how to get your quiz up and converting so you can start building your email list right away

Chanti pulls out all the stops in this episode to help you fast track to hitting publish and turning your fans into email subscribers. 

Psst… if you’re not sure what’s next once your audience gets their results, well, we talk about that, too. It’s my very last question for Chanti and I know you’ll love it. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 22, 2021
#372: How Much Does It Actually Cost To Start & Successfully Grow A Biz with Jamie Trull
36:10

In this episode, she and I help you get clear on finances and the secrets to saving money, so you can run a successful (and lucrative) business. 

If you’re anything like me you may have fallen for shiny object syndrome a time or two while running your business. 

Raise your hand if you’ve found yourself buying courses or subscriptions that weren’t what you really needed to get your business off the ground...

Yep. I’ve been there, too.

Here’s the thing, knowing what financial investments to make when you’re running an online business can be confusing. And it can be easy to invest in a product, service, or tool you think you need but isn’t actually what you need at all.

If you’re just starting out as a business owner or you’ve been at this for a while, figuring out your finances is an essential part of your journey. 

This is why I have my peer, student, and financial expert, Jamie Trull on the show today. 

During the episode, we dive into what it looks like to actually start a business from a financial standpoint. 

Jamie’s a genius when it comes to helping business owners, like you, feel confident about their financials. I love having her on the show because she shows that you can absolutely handle the numbers side of your business and have some fun, too.

In this episode you’ll get information to help you really understand:

  • What financials should look like when you’re starting a business
  • Where to invest in your business so the financial decisions you make align with your big goals
  • Ways to save so you can grow quickly and strategically as you build your business 

Plus we walk you through the tips you need to start paying yourself, prepare for taxes, and invest back into your business.

Yes - you can absolutely do this --  and we are here to help. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 15, 2021
#371: The 30,000 Foot View: Crafting Your 4-Part Customer Journey
21:07

An online buyer’s experience that’s effectively mapped out from start to finish can help you create the entrepreneurial family of your dreams -- one where everyone feels seen, heard, and understood.

Being intentional about crafting a clear journey for your business is key to cultivating a community and showing your audience that they matter and aren’t just another number or subscriber.

In today’s podcast episode, I’ll teach you the four phases you need to consider when thinking about the journey of each of your loyal fans. Phases that include:

  • Phase 1: Attraction
  • Phase 2: Nurture
  • Phase 3: Promotion
  • Phase 4: Onboarding (don’t miss the one element in phase four you can’t skip but many entrepreneurs do!) 

I’ll also show you how to put together your business pathway (or revitalize the pathway you already have) in order to keep your loyal fans on track through the entire time they’re with you on your business journey.

Get ready to knock the socks off your customers and create a journey they can remember with today’s episode! 

Apr 08, 2021
#370: Behind-The-Scenes: How I Collect Money-Making Testimonials
31:47

Customer testimonials can help you grow your business online and expand your reach. 

Your digital course and online business success will skyrocket when you have glowing testimonials to share with the world. 

Are you interested in significantly increasing your sales, boosting your lead magnet sign-ups and email subscribers, or growing your audience exponentially?

I have a feeling you’re saying, “Come on, Amy! Of course, I am!”

Well my friend, listen up because I’m going to tell you one simple strategy that will help you do all of those things I mentioned. 

Two words… glowing testimonials

They are simply the bread and butter of your business, and today, I’m giving you my behind-the-scenes, step-by-step process for finding and gathering testimonials that will be so top-notch that they do the selling for you. 

And yes, there is a process -- trust me! In this episode, you’ll learn…

  • why testimonials are worth spending time collecting

  • how to find them

  • how to request them

  • how to conduct an interview

  • the proper way to format them to make sure they convert

  • where to use them

And because I love when I can gift you a step-by-step action-taking tool -- I’ve put together a free plug-&-play resource of the emails that we use to gather testimonials, along with the questions we ask in our testimonial interviews. Get it here.

Here’s a preview of the episode: 

  • [05:05] A well-written testimonial is the ultimate social proof for you and your business. It's important to build that know, like, and trust factor. 
  • [10:33] Look for testimonials everywhere! In your posts, comments, and actively seek them in your Facebook group. 
  • [15:33] You can collect testimonials from your one-on-one work about your strategies or your teaching style. And of course, from your digital course or project. 
  • [22:20] Create one place in Dropbox for all of your testimonials. Have a testimonial shell, so that you can find them easily.
  • [23:30] Use a specific formula for crafting your testimonial. Use what they gave you and do your best to finesse it. A three part testimonial should include the problem, the solution, and the results!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 01, 2021
#369: Common Strategies For Uncommon Success With John Lee Dumas
37:00

John Lee Dumas teaches his most successful online business strategies

Get ready to take action and accomplish your entrepreneurial goals

Success secrets?

Out-of-the-box thinking?

Business plans that work wonders? 

Ok, friend, you know what that means. Today’s podcast guest is FIRE.

I’m so excited to welcome John Lee Dumas back for his 4th appearance on the podcast.

This episode is a must-listen, especially if your entrepreneurial and digital course goals include time and location freedom, financial independence, personal fulfillment… and more. 

As an entrepreneur that has helped set the foundation for business success in the online marketplace and who has interviewed thousands of the world’s most successful entrepreneurs on his podcast, Entrepreneurs on Fire, John Lee Dumas is giving us his best secrets when it comes to:

  • Building a content plan
  • Diversifying your revenue streams
  • Increasing traffic (um, YES PLEASE!) 

Plus… John reveals his business success tips and his out-of-the-box thinking when it comes to creating a business plan that stands out from the crowd. 

Are you ready? It’s time to take notes and take action. 

Here is the episode highlight reel:

  • [07:06] JLD shares his content production plan, which includes what he calls the “Zone of Fire.”
  • [11:36] You don't have to do everything yourself. JLD shares how his team works to produce consistent and accurate content. 
  • [15:28] JLD shares how he diversifies his revenue streams and how this has helped him scale his business. 
  • [20:07] “Boring will put you out of business.” People want to be entertained, and JLD shares how to stand out and keep things exciting.
  • [28:59] Be willing to do things that other people aren't willing to do. When you set your barrier super high your competition will end up being low.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 29, 2021
#368: Kick These Excuses To The Curb: 5 Digital Course Myths Debunked
19:19

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [03:58] Myth#1: Creating a digital course takes too much time. If you want to create a course, you're going to have to set aside some devoted time and effort.
  • [07:18] Myth #2: You need a huge email list to sell a digital course. You can launch with a small list and still achieve success. It's about quality over quantity. 
  • [09:09] Myth #3: You have to be a video or webinar expert. You don't have to be an expert to begin, my friend. You'll get more comfortable over time -- trust me!
  • [11:38] Myth #4: You have to have everything figured out before you get started. Where will you be one year from now if you keep waiting? The longer you wait, the less likely you'll ever start. Just start somewhere!
  • [14:00] Myth #5: It's really expensive to create and launch a digital course. You don't need to spend very much to do your first few launches. In fact, you can even sell your course before you create anything -- something I teach in Digital Course Academy!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 25, 2021
#367: How This Mompreneur Stopped Trading Time For Dollars (& You Can Too) with Maria Dior Duegaard Amdahl
34:34

Organic business growth can happen even when you’re juggling home-life responsibilities.

Holy Cow, friend! Wait until you listen to this conversation with my student and 7-figure business owner, Maria Dior Duegaard Amdahl.

I wanted to invite Maria to the show because I knew her entrepreneurial journey is one that will light a fire under your you-know-what and give you the exact steps you need to take action.  

When Maria started her business she was juggling a lot -- her business plan, her family (she’s got three kiddos, a hubby, and a dog at home!), and building her online community.

As a successful health coach working 1:1 with entrepreneurs, it didn’t take Maria long to realize that she was trading time for dollars and needed to pivot to a different path. (And quickly!) 

In this episode, Maria takes us along on her journey from trading time for dollars to running a $3 million dollar business.  And as you listen to our conversation, I know you’ll see that she’s no different from you. Her success can be your success, sweet friend. 

Plus you’ll get the insiders scoop into:

  • Maria’s best strategies for accomplishing ALL of your business goals… (even when you have minimal time)
  • The tangible action items Maria uses for growing an online community organically
  • How to pick yourself back up after failing and keep moving forward 

Here’s what I love about this interview the most...

Maria gives you action items you can start implementing today and she doesn’t hold back! 

If you’re ready to build, grow, and scale your online business and still have enough time to make dinner at the end of the day, this episode is for you.

Here is your highlight guide to this episode:

  • [03:21] Maria shares her story of running a fitness studio for pregnant women and how transitioning to an online business allowed her to scale and reach $3 million in revenue.
  • [10:38] Maria created a system to be very mindful of how she spends her time -- she shares more about this in the freebie for this episode!
  • [15:53] She shares about her webinar show up rate of 58 percent with a 48 percent conversion rate and how she made this happen. 
  • [22:11] Maria's secret is being herself and allowing herself the time to take the steps she needs to take while still being human flaws and all. 
  • [27:12] Don't fall into the habit of thinking you have to learn everything before you take action, Maria shares how to do this.

Grab your free resource from today’s episode!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 18, 2021
SPECIAL: Facebook iOS Update For Ad Campaigns: All You Need To Know
34:12

In this very special bonus podcast episode, my friend Salome Schillack, and I are talking about how Facebook (and Instagram) are making changes to their ability to target some iOS users. (If you’ve got an Apple product, that’s you!)

The result? This presents a little hiccup for entrepreneurs wanting to use their ad platform to track customers and conversions.

And while this does make things a little more challenging, all is not lost. There are ways to navigate the changes and minimize how it disrupts your ad campaigns. 

If you’re using Facebook ads to launch bigger, scale faster, and grow your audience online, this episode is one you want to listen to immediately.

Join me and Salome, as we talk about these changes, how to work with them to create successful ads, and what next steps you need to take to continue seeing results from the ads you’re running.

Mar 15, 2021
#366: How To Turn Your Expertise Into A Successful Course with Azhelle Wade
43:12

Are you ready for your brand to be widely known? 

Learn how to turn your expertise into a digital course with Azhelle Wade. 

I love bragging about my students. Honestly! The stuff they do always amazes me. 

And what’s even more fun is that I know you like to hear their stories and strategies too.  So it’s a win-win when they’re a podcast guest! 

I’m so excited to introduce you to my Digital Course Academy student, Azhelle Wade. 

Azhelle is an amazing student of mine. She's an entrepreneur, President of The Toy Coach, and host of the podcast, Making It in The Toy Industry and knows a thing or two about the power of taking your expertise and turning it into a successful course.

And if you’re wondering if you too can take your know-how and turn it into a passionate online business, you’re in luck! In this interview, Azhelle didn’t hold back from sharing her process and strategy that she used to get her expertise out into the world and kickstart her journey as an entrepreneur.

In this episode we talked about:

  • Making your expertise a successful business
  • Creating a “known for” brand
  • Azhelle’s  story about breaking through the glass ceiling of diversity in her industry
  • The best advice she has on how to make the leap from corporate into entrepreneurship
  • Her unique approach to a successful launch

If you’re ready to learn how to make your expertise into a successful course - this episode is ready to help!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [07:34] Fun fact: Savings will set you free. You may not need as much as you think you do. Look at places where you may be able to cut.
  • [09:27] As a cancer survivor, health was one of Azhelle's fears. She ended up getting a new lease on life and a mindset shift.
  • [13:52] Azhelle had a clear vision of who her ideal customer community was. She started asking what they needed to thrive.
  • [18:57] Learn Azhelle’s launch tips and how she ended up making $11,000 over the next 48 hours. 
  • [34:52] Know what your mission is for your brand and who you're going to help and why and how you're going to help them.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 11, 2021
#365: Leave Your 9-5 & Kickstart Being Your Own Boss: Here’s How!
25:32

Are you ready to be your own boss and create a new online business? 

Make the leap from your 9 to 5 and kick start your entrepreneurial journey! 

Before I started my business, I would sit in my corporate cubicle and dream about creating a digital course and online business. 

The problem was, I had no idea how to create a digital course.

I also didn't have an email list, a social media following, or a roadmap to show me how to leave my cubicle behind and build an online business. Raise your hand if you can relate!

If this sounds anything like you and you’re ready to make the leap from 9 to 5 cubicle to digital course entrepreneurship, I’m excited for you to hear all about it in this podcast episode.

In it, I tell you all about what I’ve learned over the last 11 plus years of building a thriving digital course business -- stories and practices you can put into place today to save you the time and headaches that I experienced along the way. (Boy how I wish someone would have done the same for me early on.) 

If you love a few behind-the-scenes stories of my early day hiccups, well then my friend, you’re in for a treat because I’m spilling the beans…. Just wait until you hear how getting yelled at on the tarmac at the airport changed my entrepreneurial journey. 

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [07:32] I left my corporate job and my first stop was working one-on-one doing social media for small businesses. I fell into the common trap of taking on too many clients.
  • [08:35] For two years, I had a business I hated!
  • [11:55] If you're in a similar situation, let go of a few clients but keep a few as well. Free up the time to create the business of your dreams. 
  • [13:11] Prioritize tiger time. Commit to at least one full hour a week to work on the business you want to work on and nothing else. 
  • [15:15] Start creating consistent content and share it with the world. 
  • [17:53] Devote time to get comfortable on video. Video brings a whole new level of connection with your audience.
  • [19:55] Fuel that big beautiful brain of yours. Becoming the go-to expert in your industry means that you never stop learning.
  • [22:00] Find a mentor or two. Having a coach or mentor that you can meet with on a regular basis is a great way to remain accountable.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 04, 2021
#364: How I Do It: Boost Your Sales with These 5 Course Enhancements
28:20

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [04:07] #1: Adding a visual element like a PDF framework or guide!
  • [09:01] #2: Invite guests to contribute. A guest can provide a different perspective and enhance your audience's experience. 
  • [13:47] #3: Use templates. Create a resource that creates a quick win. I offer an upsell of slide deck templates. 
  • [16:48] #4: Offer swipe files. Materials that you've used but have edited so your students can make it their own. 
  • [20:55] #5: Give them more of you. (My personal favorite!) Your students want more of you! Schedule where you can show up for your students in advance.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Feb 25, 2021
#363: How To Silence Your Inner Critic & Commit To Success With Jamie Kern Lima
55:56

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [16:05] Jamie shares her secret to getting through years of rejection. 
  • [26:16] Write down things that are inspiring and true about you and keep them in your magic toolbox. (I love this idea!) 
  • [28:46] You're not here to compete with anybody else other than who you're born to become. (Let’s put that on repeat!
  • [41:36] When you're an entrepreneur getting a “no” can definitely feel personal. Figure out how to keep it from being personal and trust the journey. 
  • [48:30] “The failure is never being willing to actually hear who you're called to be and the truth of who you are.” - Jamie Kern Lima
Feb 22, 2021
#362: How To Write Emails That Actually Get Opened with Zafira Rajan
41:07

Want to write weekly emails that *actually* get opened? Read on… 

That’s right, my friend! Writing your weekly emails doesn’t have to be a chore. In fact, it can be a joy, and my guest in this episode will give you the tools you need to make that a reality. 

Her name is Zafira Rajan, and she’s a strategic launch copywriter and soulful strategist committed to helping conscious entrepreneurs build, grow, and scale their businesses using storytelling. 

In this episode, she’s sharing a step-by-step for identifying what she calls “Personality Pillars,” which will give you a bank of ideas to have on hand when you’re ready to sit down and write.

As well as her top three strategies for creating a weekly non-negotiable ritual for writing consistent email copy.

How To Become A Pro Copywriter

  • [09:26] Personality pillars are at the core of how Zafira shows up for brands. It's about showing the dimensions of you.
  • [14:36] Your first pillar is your core values. We all have values and things we stand for whether they are business or personal. 
  • [15:56] Your second pillar is your stamp of weirdness. What do people find weird, funny, natural, or even interesting about you? 
  • [18:15] The third pillar is your intentional impact. Whether you're launching or not, it's important to remind people consistently that you have something that they can buy.
  • [20:54] The fourth pillar is your unapologetic opinion. What point of view do I have that I'm afraid to share? The people who you want to bring into your life and attract will appreciate your point of view.
  • [24:45]  Your fifth element is your “Z” or zest factor. This is what you sprinkle on top of everything to make it uniquely yours. This is the sweet spot between what you do and why people care about it.
  • [32:33] Create an environment that sets a tone for writing or creating content. Design a custom writing ritual. Light a candle and get in the zone.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Feb 18, 2021
Bonus: How To Get A Quick Cash Boost For Your Business
24:55

What if I told you I have a few fun strategies for making a quick cash boost for your business... 

Would you be interested in hearing more? I thought you might be. 

In this episode, I share six strategies for getting a nice little cash injection for your business. 

I recently went live in my Thrive Facebook group to share these strategies, and it was a hit. So naturally, I wanted to share it with you. 

If you’re tuning into this episode in realtime, we are a few weeks away from the doors opening to my signature program, Digital Course Academy. And so, to support those who want to enroll, I put together these savvy strategies. 

But then I got to thinking, whether you’re going to join me in DCA or not, I think any entrepreneur would love a quick cash injection whether they use it to invest back into their business or if they use it to pay their mortgage. 

So, here we are. Enjoy these six strategies but promise me this… if you’re going to use any of them, be sure you go all in -- play full out. Deal? 

How to get a quick cash boost

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [07:56] Strategy #1: Offer limited one-on-one consulting or coaching. Sometimes it helps to get in the trenches with your own clients, customers, and students.
  • [10:24] Strategy #2: Offer a limited-time group coaching program. You can help more people and make it more affordable.
  • [11:42] Strategy #3: Audit your spending habits. If you're looking for a quick cash injection, it might already be at your fingertips.
  • [14:58] Strategy #4: Host and charge for a very low ticket challenge. Take your audience through an experience every single day.
  • [17:25] Strategy #5: Offer your insights through market research. There are examples and opportunities in the free guide.
  • [19:09] Strategy #6: Transcribe audio interviews. I transcribed hundreds of hours of Tony Robbins speaking.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Feb 15, 2021
#361: Your Clubhouse Invite: Is This Social Platform Right For You With Coach Glitter
01:08:19

Wanna know everything about Clubhouse? You’re in the right place! 

Clubhouse is the newest and hottest platform in 2021… so we've heard. But what exactly is it all about? And with the vast number of places for an entrepreneur to hang out online, is it worth adding to your to-do list? 

In this episode, all of your questions will be answered!

I’ve brought on my dear friend, Tiffany Lee Bymaster (a.k.a. Coach Glitter) on to share her experience on Clubhouse. 

Tiffany is a blogger, consultant, affiliate marketer, brand expert, and creator of the Lights, Camera, Branding online program. She’s recently been spending a lot of time on this new platform to figure out the best way to use it. 

In this episode, you’ll learn the how, what, and why of Clubhouse, as well as, if it’s a good place to spend your time as an entrepreneur. 

Ready to make connections and get Clubhouse savvy? 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show here! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Feb 11, 2021
#360: How To Use Content & Storytelling To Grow Your Business With Aprille Franks
32:36

One of the most powerful ways to connect to your audience… stories!

Holy cow! This episode was *fire*! (Do I have your attention? Good, read on!)

I invited Aprille Franks on, master community builder and launch strategist, to give you a step-by-step process for identifying powerful stories to use in your business (think: copywriting, social media, content, and live video) to more deeply connect with your audience. 

After all, nothing brings us together more than sharing stories of struggles, accomplishments, and perseverance. Especially in a pandemic and a world where we are more connected to the internet than one another -- stories bring us back to the truth of our existence. 

Grab a pen and paper and get ready for actionable steps that you can apply to get a quick win today. 

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

  • [06:04] It's important to use stories in our content because that's how people resonate and connect. People are looking for a community to connect with. 
  • [08:14] There are five components for building bankable stories. The first is understanding why the story impacts your brand relevance. 
  • [09:15] The second thing is how to go from 0 to 60. Aprille walks you through how to do this.
  • [14:59] The third is to avoid getting stuck wondering how this is relevant for your business. Don't discount the things that make you who you are. 
  • [17:32] The fourth, identify what your audience needs to know next.
  • [19:10] Lastly, connect your content with your stories. Be intentional with planning the story and content to create connectivity. 
  • [27:18] Hot tip: Write down your instances and go through the process and then share one story on video. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Feb 04, 2021
#359: Customer Support 101: Proven Strategies To Create Life-Long Customers
22:45

My secret for creating a sustained, successful business? Customer support excellence! 

11 years in business, thousands of customers served, and I think it’s safe to say I’ve learned a thing or two about how to make a customer's experience top-notch and unforgettable.

Would you like my secrets? Well, entrepreneurial friend… you’re in luck!

In this episode, I’m giving you all my best tips and strategies for empowering your customers, making them feel genuinely important, and providing them with a customer journey like they’ve never experienced before. 

Your business is not a transactional organization, it’s a transformative organization. 

When you remember this in all you do and the decisions you make, you’ll set your business and community up for success, support, and a life-long relationship. 

Learn my top tips for enhancing your customer experience wow-factor!

  • [05:32] You need to decide what the “wow-factor” means to you. For us, it's doing all the right behaviors with all the right intentions for all of the right results. 
  • [06:29] Number 1: Listen diligently to your customers and meet them where they are -- understand their pain points and where you can serve them better. Be transformative not transactional.
  • [10:19] Number 2: Be transparent. Identify who your course is not for and who it’s a good fit for.
  • [11:52] Number 3: Slow down and celebrate your students. When you celebrate your customers, you'll be amazed at how you create life-long loyal customers.
  • [19:21] Hot tip: Don't be afraid to use your virtual assistant to help support your current and future customers.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 28, 2021
#358: Your Backstage Pass To The Entrepreneur Experience: The Best Advice You’ll Receive This Year
29:24

Your VIP behind-the-scenes peek into my virtual event, Entrepreneur’s Experience: The Course Creators edition just arrived!

That’s right, sweet friend! I’m sharing powerful snippets from the speakers at my December virtual event. Here’s a little rundown of who you’re about to hear from…

  • Michael Hyatt, my personal mentor, and brilliant entrepreneur, dishes on organization strategies for increasing your productivity
  • Zafira Rajan, an expert copywriter, and soulful brand strategist is sharing strategies for making your sales page headlines and bio stand out 
  • Jasmine Star, Queen of Instagram and branding, will be spilling the beans on something she calls “photo topics” and easy ways to make a “photo bank”
  • Stu McLaren, membership master and our favorite funny guy, is digging into creating an engaged community that actually wants to participate.

Here’s your high dose course creator and entrepreneurial inspiration… 

  • [03:20] Today is your lucky day because I’m sharing clips from the Entrepreneur Virtual Experience. These are tips that every entrepreneur should know when building the business of their dreams. 
  • [04:38] Michael Hyatt shares how to redesign your day and tackle tasks effectively to increase productivity. 
  • [07:54] Zafira Rajan talks about how to make headlines and bios do the selling for you. 
  • [16:20] Jasmine Star shares how to keep it simple with an Instagram productivity plan by creating photo topics and a photo bank. All you need is a camera/phone and caption templates. (Jasmine even shares an action item.)
  • [22:32] Stu McLaren talks about creating a strong community with strong engagement.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 21, 2021
#357: 5 Common Facebook Ad Mistakes: How To Avoid Them & Save Money with Emily Hirsh
35:35

5 common Facebook ad mistakes -- and how to avoid them!  

Listen, Facebook ads don’t need to be complicated or messy. Oh no, my friend! Quite the opposite. They should be a powerful and effective tool for growing your online business and attracting your ideal community. 

My guest and Facebook ads expert, Emily Hirsh, is on a mission to help you become BFFs with advertising on Facebook. In this episode, she shares the 5 most common mistakes entrepreneurs make when using this growth strategy and how to avoid them. 

She gives you tangible action items so you can get started with her advice today.

Whether you’ve been using Facebook ads for years, or you’ve been a little intimidated to dive into them, this episode is going to ease those fears and make sure you’re not leaving money on the table. 

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

  • [06:02] Mistake #1: Not defining what success means for your marketing. 
  • [10:05] Mistake #2: Not doing enough testing -- most of the time messaging is the problem. 
  • [12:43] Mistake #3: Only running one campaign. 
  • [15:45] When you boost a post the objective of your ad is engagement. Put ads in every spot of your customer journey where you would like people to take action. 
  • [19:32] Mistake #4: Not letting the testing work long enough. 
  • [23:38] Mistake #5: Not paying attention to the numbers. Test, refine, and repeat. The numbers will always tell you what to do.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 18, 2021
#356: Sales Page Struggles? Boost Your Conversions With These 3 Tips
20:02

Sales page struggling to convert? Here’s what to do!

Just like you, your sales page is a big deal. 

And when it isn’t converting, it’s easy to feel defeated. (Trust me, I’ve been there, my friend!)

Luckily, there are a few minor tweaks that you can make to your sales page that will have it converting like crazy and leave your potential students saying, “I need this, NOW,” and then hitting that buy button. 

In this episode, you’ll gain the guidance you need to simplify your sales page with a powerful layout that has worked extremely well in my own business. 

When it comes to a compelling sales page, there are a few features you want to pay attention to: your call-to-action, your “Magic Mirror,” and your “Highlight Reel.” And don’t you worry, I’ll explain what all of those mean. 

Once you get these dialed in, it’s smooth sailing to attract your ideal community to your offer. 

Ready to get your sales page converting like crazy? 

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

  • [02:10] If done right, your sales page can be gold. It can be one of the most essential parts of your sales funnel, customer journey, and conversion success. 
  • [04:27] Your sales page is a tool to deliver the four W's of your offer. These are what your offer is, who it's for, why you created it, and what transformation your course offers. 
  • [06:30] Sprinkle your CTA confetti throughout your sales page. Have four different CTAs with one near the top for action takers, one after your offer and bonus content, one after your money back promise, and one at the bottom of your sales page.
  • [09:30] Clearly state who your product and offer is for and place this near the top of your sales page. This is the magic mirror where they see themselves in the copy and keep reading. 
  • [14:03] Future pacing is like a highlight reel that paints a picture of what is possible for your student and how your offer will get them there.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 14, 2021
#355: Money Made Simple: An Entrepreneurs Guide to Taking Control of Your Finances with Rachel Cruze
36:03

Do you know why you handle your money the way you do?

My guest, Rachel Cruze, is going to help you figure out the answer to that question. (And so much more!)

You may have heard of her because she’s a two-time #1 national best-selling author, financial expert, and host of The Rachel Cruze Show. 

Since 2010, Rachel has served at Ramsey Solutions where she teaches people to avoid debt, save money, budget, and how to win with money at any stage in life.

In this episode, Rachel and I are chatting about…

  • Money principles every entrepreneur should abide by
  • How to invest in your business the right way and talk to your partner about that investment
  • How to identify which money classroom you're in and what that means for you

And so much more.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 07, 2021
Your Newest Podcast Obsession: Talking Body (Exclusive Announcement)
15:14

This is what happens when Rachel Hollis and I get together…

I’m mostly known as an entrepreneur, wife, and stepmom, and someone who likes to challenge myself daily. 

And this year, I’m taking on a challenge that’s pretty different from the business content I’m known for -- and it’s all has to do with talking about our bodies.

I said “yes” to joining forces with Rachel Hollis to create a 12-week podcast series called “Talking Body,” where we delve into real, raw, and honest conversations around body acceptance and love. 

Throughout each episode, you’ll hear me having deep and honest conversations with body experts, thought leaders, and women from all walks of life to explore our experiences with loving, hating, and growing into our own bodies.

Talking Body will answer questions like…  

  • Can I love my body and still want to change things about it?
  • How does my experience as a white woman differ from those experienced by women of color?
  • Does being healthy equal being desirable, or are we just told that it does?
  • Do I own my self-image, or is it just another product I post online?

This episode is an exclusive sneak peek about this limited series, and I hope you’ll join me for the entirety of this transformation journey which kicks off on Thursday, January 14th!.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jan 05, 2021
#354: Counting Down The Hottest Strategies From OMME In 2020
44:08

Well, my friend, it looks like we’re finally here… at the end of 2020.

And while at times it felt like it would never arrive, we’ve finally made it.  As we inch our way closer to counting down until the ball drops, I wanted to do my own little countdown of some of the hottest and most listened to clips from our Online Marketing Made Easy episodes in 2020. 

Strategies & Tips For Entrepreneurial Growth In 2021

Here’s a glimpse of what you’ll learn in this episode…

  1. Jam Gamble on finding your story and content topics
  2. How to price your offer the right way
  3. Tips for improving your landing page for higher conversions
  4. Andrea Olsen on setting boundaries and working smarter
  5. How to niche down
  6. Jasmine Star on repurposing content with ease
  7. My favorite strategy for making money in between launches
  8. Gayneté Jones shares a strategy for increasing your webinar signups
  9. A hot tip for getting people off the fence during a webinar
  10. Jasmine shares an Instagram strategy for converting followers to email subscribers

Grab your bubbly beverage (I’ve got a little kombucha), and let’s countdown the top moments of Online Marketing Made Easy together!

Counting down the best of Online Marketing Made Easy...

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 30, 2020
#353: Your Confidence Success Path for Showing Up Online with Ivirlei Brookes
35:29

Be your most confident self online in 2021

I recall the days of doing a Facebook Live when you couldn’t see how many people were tuning in. Talk about having an E.T. moment… “Is anyone out there?”

Nowadays, when you show up Live online, you can see who is tuning in. Thank the Tech Gods!

And while we can see a real-time number of who is joining in to soak up your guidance and expertise, that doesn’t make feeling an overwhelming sense of confidence a shoe-in. If you’re anything like me, I have to work at showing up confidently online. 

My guest in this episode, Ivirlei Brookes, is a pro when it comes to showing up intentionally and radiating confidence. Ivirlei is a business and mindset coach with 10 years of experience in helping entrepreneurs just like you build their confidence. 

She’s sharing her 5 step process, as well as some tangible action items that you can implement right away for increasing your confidence and showing up big and bold this year. 

Time to show up with confidence, my friend!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 23, 2020
#352: 3 Free Organic Traffic Strategies To Grow Your Audience Quickly
27:03

How can I get traffic to my business for free?

Enter… organic traffic strategies. (And I’ve got a few up my sleeve for you!)

Definition of organic traffic: the visitors who land on your social platforms as a result of unpaid (“organic”) search results.

And while I wish I could give you a magic bullet for growing your business with this marketing approach, that’s just not possible. 

Instead, what I’ll say is that with consistency and patience, you’ll reap the benefits of your efforts. In today’s episode, I’ll share three powerful strategies that will promote organic growth and traffic to your online business. 

These 3 strategies include: 

  • Pitching yourself (don’t worry, I have a template for you to use)
  • Indirect and direct social posts
  • Going out and finding your ideal community members

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 17, 2020
#351: Pivot Your Messaging: The Ultimate Checklist for Troubleshooting When Conversions Are Down
26:15

 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 10, 2020
#350: Perfecting Your Pitch: 5-Steps To Sell With Ease with David Meltzer
37:42

Ready to perfect your pitch and *finally* sell with ease?

What if I told you that you could statistically increase your chances of selling your product or service, even if you’re just starting out or have struggled with selling in the past? 

Well, I have 5 proven steps to help you do just that. This episode is a step-by-step to get you on the fast-track to selling your product like a pro all by perfecting your pitch!

Now, I couldn’t talk about pitching without inviting the pitching expert of all experts, David Meltzer, onto the show.

David is the expert when it comes to selling with ease. In this episode, he shares his 5 to Thrive for creating the absolute perfect pitch. These are 5 tangible strategies you need to implement into your pitch to make it sell and to make an impact.

Be sure to stick around until the end because I take what David shares and give you the exact strategy to apply during your launch webinar pitches and beyond!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 07, 2020
#349: The VA Solution: Your Step-By-Step Guide To Hiring & Successfully Working With A VA with Shannon Miles
43:34

How to hire and work with a Virtual Assistant

This is a question I get asked all the time. “Amy, how do I know when I’m ready for a VA? And, how do I hire and work with one?”

It’s a valid question, and if you’re serious about growing your business it’s one you should be asking. 

I hired my first VA in 2011, and I consider it one of the best entrepreneurial decisions of my journey so far. 

My first VA helped me take my business to the next level because her support allowed me to truly focus on the areas of my business that I excelled in.

But I get it, it’s hard to know when you’re really ready for a VA, how to go about hiring one, what tasks to have them do, and when to uplevel your working relationship with them. 

To help you get more clarity on those things, I’ve invited my dear friend and VA expert, Shannon Miles to join me on the show.

Shannon is the owner and creator of Belay Solutions, a company that connects entrepreneurs with virtual specialists to help support their growth and in this episode, she’s sharing the progression of hiring and working with a VA

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Dec 03, 2020
#348: How To Create *True* Wealth In Your Business (& Life) with Patrice Washington
48:53

Ready to create more abundance in your business? 

Have you ever been to an event where the speaker left you crying, laughing, and so inspired that you felt you could climb Mount Kilimanjaro all at the same time? 

Well, today’s guest is that kind of speaker and coach! Her name is Patrice Washington, and I am one lucky girl to call her a friend and have her on to share her expertise with you. 

Patrice is an award-winning author, transformational speaker, coach, and media personality.

She was named one of “12 Inspiring Black Voices in Personal Development” by Success Magazine, featured on Forbes.com as one of “15 Inspiring Podcasts for Professionals of Every Stripe,” and highlighted by Entrepreneur.com -- to name a few impressive successes. 

She’s committed to empowering women to look at life through the lens of abundance and opportunity versus lack and scarcity, and redefine the term “wealth.”

In this episode, we chat about her 6 Pillars of Wealth and how these pillars will help you uplevel your life and business. You might be surprised to find out that only one of these pillars is directly tied to money. 

Learn more about Patrice Washington's 6 Pillars of Wealth

  • [12:57] Patrice created the six pillars to help people shift their beliefs and mindset about wealth, which will shift your actions and the results will come. 
  • [17:26] Pillar #1: FIT is about becoming your best self and being physically and mentally fit. 
  • [21:35] Pillar #2: PEOPLE is about creating relationships that matter. 
  • [27:22] Pillar #3: FAITH (whatever that means to you personally) will prevent you from giving up right before you're about to succeed. 
  • [30:49] Pillar #4: SPACE is important because your environment is everything. 
  • [36:38] Pillar #5: WORK is about living your life's purpose. 
  • [40:57] Pillar #6: MONEY is the last pillar. When your mind is cluttered, it's hard to accept the foundational truths about managing money.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Nov 25, 2020
#347: The ONE Thing All Successful Entrepreneurs Do For Time, Location, & Financial Freedom (And Why You Should Too!)
28:31

What you need to know about habits and successful entrepreneurs

I know I speak for many entrepreneurs when I say that committing to a routine in the morning and before closing your eyes at night can play a big role in succeeding as an entrepreneur, as well as personally.

Now, before you think that this is just another habits episode, I want you to hold your horses because this is not just another habits episode. 

This episode is a real-life, no fluff, habits-in-a-time-of-a-pandemic podcast episode you need if you’re serious about becoming the very best version of yourself amidst building a six or seven-figure business and finding not just work-life balance but finding consistent and long-term full-life balance.

I’m laying out the 3 P’s of creating habits that stick, which is a step-by-step process for finally creating lifelong habits. Here’s a peek at the 3 P’s:

  • Pitch
  • Practice
  • Perfect

How to create habits for mental, emotional, physical, and entrepreneurial well-being 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Nov 19, 2020
#346: How This 7-Figure Business Owner Uses Her Podcast To Drive Traffic with Jenna Kutcher
42:14

Because it’s been a minute since we’ve talked about podcasting as an entrepreneur… I decided to invite my dear friend, Jenna Kutcher, back on to have a little chit chat around podcasts, entrepreneurship, and how they work in unison to boost organic traffic. 

Jenna is a fellow lover of online marketing, runs a 7-figure business, and hosts a top-rated podcast.

In this episode, we talk about how a podcast can support your business in more ways than just generating revenue. We’re also going to give you some behind-the-scenes lessons we’ve learned as podcasters.

Whether you have a podcast or are thinking about starting one (or maybe you haven’t even thought about it but I’ve piqued your interest), you’re going to get so much out of this episode. 

A glance at how to use a podcast to drive traffic to your business
  • [06:34] Jenna says that podcasting extends your brand in a way that isn't possible with social media alone. People are literally inviting you into their lives wherever they are. 
  • [10:18] Jenna and I spill the beans on why we chose podcasts as our weekly platform. 
  • [14:32] Any industry can benefit from starting a podcast -- yes, that means your industry too!
  • [17:12] When first starting out, Jenna used her podcast along with content upgrades to convert listeners into subscribers by creating a new freebie for each episode. 
  • [23:33] Jenna strategically plans out her episodes to tackle listener objections, shift mindsets, and educate potential buyers before she launches. 
  • [27:08] When Jenna first started out, she asked a company she used called HoneyBook to partner with her to cover production costs. Learn her best tips for generating revenue when you are just starting out.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Nov 12, 2020
#345: The One Where We Make Business Legal Jargon Sexy with Ashley Kirkwood
35:43

Legally protecting your content and intellectual property is important stuff 

Attention all entrepreneurs: There’s a new law in town that’s a game-changer for your business… and you need to know about. 

Trust me when I say that this law is going to make your life a whole lot easier. And because I’m always on a mission to help you simplify your business, I invited an expert on to talk about this law (and so much more)!

Ashley Kirkwood is a lawyer by trade with an impressive history of working for many prestigious law firms. She’s also an author, has been featured in many national media outlets, and runs a nonprofit with her husband. (She’s kind of a big deal.)

In today’s episode, Ashley is going to share all that you need to know, step-by-step (a girl after my own heart), about this game-changing law. 

She’ll also talk about…

  • What every creator should do before launching
  • What to do if you realize you’re infringing on someone else’s work
  • Keeping your Facebook group legal

And so much more!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Nov 05, 2020
#344: 5-Steps For Creating & Repurposing Your Content Calendar Like A Boss
33:55

Do you ever feel like you’re in a content creation drought?

I hear you, friend! And lucky for you, I’ve got a 5-step process for helping you identify your core content so you can say goodbye to that feeling for good. 

Sound too good to be true? Stick with me. 

If there’s one thing I’ve learned over the years of being an entrepreneur, it’s that being very clear on my core content is not only helpful in creating content across my brand, but it also helps me to be more present with my audience, and it helps to set me up as an expert in my industry. 

This is why, in this episode, I’m walking you through a 5-step process for identifying your core content, getting comfortable sharing the message of that content, and then how to adjust it as needed.

Plus, I even share a hot tip to help you with your messaging and content even in times of uncertainty… hello, 2020!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 29, 2020
#343: From Bankruptcy To The Today Show: Become The Creative Visionary Of Your Business & Life With Tracy Matthews
51:31

You know how they say diamonds are a girl’s best friend? Well, if we're being honest, I think you and I can both agree that creativity is an entrepreneur’s best friend… or at least it should be!

But I get it! When there are other things that need to get done within your business -- especially when you’re starting out -- creativity can fall by the wayside. 

Which is why I wanted to introduce you to a woman who is fierce, successful, and stays at the top of her creative game as the Creative Visionary of her business, Flourish & Thrive Academy. Her name is Tracy Matthews!

But before she found the success, entrepreneurial satisfaction, and creativity that she has today, she experienced tough times that eventually led her to bankruptcy. 

In this episode, we talk about creative energy, how to protect it, her journey from bankruptcy to a successful businesswoman, what to do about the nay-sayers in your life, and my personal favorite, the creative archetypes she’s identified, and how knowing this can serve you and your business. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 26, 2020
#342: Behind-The-Scenes With My Mentor, Michael Hyatt: Why Entrepreneurs Will Save The World
34:26

Entrepreneurship has been declining in recent years.

Uh oh! I, for one, do not like the sound of that. However, after chatting with my dear friend and business mentor, Michael Hyatt, I’m starting to see how we can reverse this trend and why it’s most important that we do.

Michael’s newest book, Entrepreneurs Will Save The World, is an invitation for anyone and everyone to step into their role as an entrepreneur.

In this interview, we chat about his new book, a few traits every entrepreneur must possess, why entrepreneurship is one of the most essential things we need whether our economy is thriving or not, and my favorite, a step-by-step method for embracing entrepreneurship and finding a solid solution.

Entrepreneurs Will Save The World

Here’s a glance at this episode...

  • [06:50] Entrepreneurs contribute to a better society. Period, end of story! Why? Because they are problem solvers, and problem-solvers are essential to our society.
  • [09:03] Three areas that entrepreneurs contribute to society include, providing jobs and growth, providing tax benefits, and making people's lives better through the goods and services they offer.
  • [21:26] One of the stages of the entrepreneurial method is to observe the problem particularly in regards to the customers or clients that you are trying to serve.
  • [26:51] As an entrepreneur, you have to have a true desire to solve the problem. Ask yourself, “What am I uniquely qualified to solve?”
  • [29:17] Pay attention to your motivation, this is important in order to succeed as an entrepreneur.
  • [32:30] Hot Tip: Shift your mindset and start seeing problems as opportunities.

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 22, 2020
#341: The Power Of Your Voice: How To Cut Through The Online Noise, Attract Your Ideal Customers, & Make $$$
54:24

I believe that as an online entrepreneur, your voice will connect you on a deeper level with your audience so that you can make more of an impact. 

My guest today couldn’t agree more. Her name is Jam Gamble, and she’s the creator of Slay The Mic and the Slay The Mic Program. Her vision is to help people understand the value of their voice.

In this episode, Jam shares some of her best tips and secrets for finding your voice, her 5-step process for using your voice to build your successful online business and presence, and what might be holding you back from really sharing your voice with the world. 

You’re going to love her step-by-step approach. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 15, 2020
#340: Landing Page Not Converting? Here’s What To Do!
27:55

Just like you, your landing page is a big deal. 

And when it isn’t converting… it’s just the pits. Can I get an amen?

Luckily, there are a few minor adjustments that you can make to your existing landing page that will have it converting like hotcakes before you know it! 

With some of my landing pages converting at over 40 percent, I know exactly what works and what doesn’t, and today, I’m sharing my secrets with you!

There are three features you want to pay attention to: your call-to-action, branding, and copy. Get these dialed in and you, my friend, are in for a landing page conversion treat. 

This episode is brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little…funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

This episode is also brought to you by Gravy, the company I trust to contact my customers within hours of a failed payment, capturing the updated billing information, and saving the customer my team and I worked so hard to acquire. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more a year and you know you’re losing money due to failed payments each month, I encourage you to check out Gravy. Click here to see how they can be an extension of your customer service and save you money.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 08, 2020
#339: Facebook Ad Strategies To Grow Your Audience Now (No Matter Where You Are In Your Business) with Salome Schillack
38:27

PSA: Facebook Ads are as complicated as trying to sneeze with your eyes open-- especially if you don’t want to pay an arm and a leg per lead. 

Orrr… are they? 

My guest today says, “false,” and by the end of this episode, you will be too!

Her name is Salome Schillack, and as CEO, Founder, and Head Facebook and Instagram Strategist of Shine & Succeed, a multi-woman Facebook Ads agency, she’s figured out how to make your Facebook Ads work for you -- and not the other way around. 

She breaks down everything you need to know about using Facebook Ads to grow your audience and how to get extremely low-cost leads, whether you’re a beginner entrepreneur or a seasoned one.

Not only do I love her because she’s my student, but also because she has a 6-step strategy (a girl after my own heart) for getting low-cost leads and dominating social media ads.  

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 05, 2020
#338: Content Made Easy: How To Organize Your Launch Content, Make $$$, and Never Run Out
24:21

Pre-launch content, webinar content, and course content. 

“How the heck do you differentiate these three areas of launch content? How do I come up with enough content for each part of my launch without giving it all away, Amy?!” 

This is a question I get a lot! In this episode, I’m breaking it all down for you.

We’ll talk about:

  • Determining the bulk of your pre-launch content (and how listening can help direct you)
  • How to leave your audience saying, “I’m excited! Now, how do I do it?” on your webinar
  • The secrets to creating valuable course content

And so much more!

You’ll walk away with a clear understanding of how the content in each area will differ, build on one another, and what content goes in each phase. 

Let's break down the episode!
  • [00:02:55] Your pre-launch content is all of the content you create and share with your audience before you open registration for your webinar. If you’re still running your first few launches, I’d suggest running your pre-launch for 30 days. 
  • [00:05:37] Your pre-launch content should help support your audience in overcoming any objections they might have when it comes to signing up for your course. You should take them on a journey over the invisible bridge. 
  • [00:08:01] Hot tip: During your webinar Q&A ask, "if you're still on the fence, what's keeping you from signing up?" 
  • [00:10:51] Your webinar should show your attendees what's possible and lead them to a new mindset. When creating the content, ask yourself the golden question, "What's the one thing my audience needs to know before buying my course?" 
  • [00:13:35] The three sections of a webinar are possibility, path, and promotion.
  • [00:18:01] Your course content is the step-by-step road map that transforms your students from where they are to where they want to be.
  • [00:21:49] Think about what you're promising and lay out the transformation from there. How will you get them from point A to where they need to be?

This episode is brought to you by Boosted, an app for iOS or Android that allows you to make beautiful, professional-looking videos for your brand's social media in three easy steps! You can use stock videos, your own videos, or even create stunning videos with your photos. With top-notch templates, easy resizing, and user-friendly video editing options, Boosted can take your social to the next level. Head here to get the discounted rate of $15 for 3 months of Boosted Premium, which offers bonus features to make your videos stand out!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Oct 01, 2020
#337: Instagram Reels: The What, How, & Why For Entrepreneurs with Jasmine Star
58:50

ICYMI: Instagram dropped another new feature in early August. You may have seen it? It’s the Instagram Reels that keep popping up around every IG corner. 

And, as the curious entrepreneur that I know you are, you’re probably wondering if this is a feature you should be paying attention to and using to grow your audience. 

To help you answer that, I went to my dear friend, Jasmine Star, aka Queen of Instagram!

THE WHAT, HOW, & WHY OF INSTAGRAM REELS

Jasmine will answer some of the questions I’ve seen my audience ask in Facebook groups, a sneak peek into what her content calendar looks like for Instagram, how to come up with five content topic ideas so you can get started with Instagram Reels, and so much more. 

You’re going to walk away with your next action steps for using Instagram Reels to start growing your audience using this new feature!

This episode is brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little…funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

This episode is also brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 24, 2020
#336: How To Create A Million-Dollar Business (What's Worked For Me)
23:06

I’ve got a little quiz for you! Are you…

A. A nine-to-fiver, dreaming of becoming an entrepreneur so that you can have the freedom and flexibility to create a life on your terms, a life that fulfills you?

B. part-time entrepreneur, but a full-time employee, waiting for the perfect moment to transition -- full time -- into your passion-filled business? 

C. full-time entrepreneur who's working endless hours, hustling to grow your business?

No matter who you are, I want you to know that right now is your chance to say yes to big, bold opportunities and to bet on you because you are the one consistent variable in your story. 

In this episode, I take you behind-the-scenes and share stories of how I’ve bet on myself and how those moments -- albeit scary -- have helped me build a multi-million dollar business.

No matter where you are in your entrepreneurial journey, this is a must-listen to take your life and business to the next level. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 17, 2020
#335: Life Coaching, Wine Tasting, & Sex Ed: How These Courses Provided Time, Financial, & Location Freedom
25:00

Have you ever thought of a brilliant digital course topic idea, only to have a follow-up thought that it would never work online?

Maybe like wine tasting, spiritual life coaching, or sex education? If you think these topics wouldn’t convert to a digital course -- think again, my friend!

Because I have four epic examples of how my students have made something unexpected work magnificently online from the courses mentioned above.

All it took was a little self-belief, a digital course, and the right know-how to get in front of the right people. 

You’ll hear how…

  • Andrea de la Mora transitioned her in-person spiritual life coaching online to generate $42,000
  • Caroline Brown generated $20,000 on her very first launch, where she taught sex ed to grown women. 
  • Natalie McLean took the physical experience of wine tasting online to generate over $30,000.
  • Rhea Baliwala’s online course for Spanish-speaking lawyers made $13,000 out of the gate -- despite her audience's uncertainty around learning online. 

My students prove that pretty much anything works as a digital course. Grab your favorite drink, get comfy, and settle in for these awesome stories.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 10, 2020
BONUS: 5-figures in 6 months & 6-figures in 1 year: This Could Be You With Jamie Trull
42:55

My guest on today’s episode was a corporate girl turned overwhelmed entrepreneur turned entrepreneur with a thriving online business, a lucrative digital course, and the time and freedom to prioritize her family and make an impact far beyond what she ever imagined.

Her name is Jamie Trull, her business is called “Balance CFO,” and you may remember her from episode #280 where I taught you how to do a “Course Validation Call” with her as my Ideal Customer Avatar.

When we first met Jamie, she had left her corporate job to become an entrepreneur so she could have the time and flexibility to be with her little ones.

But working one on one with clients only left her feeling overwhelmed, attached to her phone, and frustrated that she didn’t have the time and energy for her family that she had hoped to gain.

After using the practices she learned in Digital Course Academy, Jamie launched her 5-week course, Financial Fitness Formula, which helps solopreneurs take control of their business finances, and ended up making five-figures.

Maybe you’re thinking, “Amy, this sounds like me! Except for the 5-figure launch part. Teach me how to grow my online business with a successful launch!”

Well, friend, I’d be happy to! To get you started, I want you to go check out my free 3-part videos series which is all about starting and growing your email list.

You can sign up for it right here!

***Also, are you signed up for my free masterclass, How To Create and Launch a Profitable Digital Course From Scratch? Click the link for more details and to save your spot!***

***Also, also, Did you hear the exciting news? The doors to Digital Course Academy are now open for enrollment! If you’re ready to create a life and business with time, location, and financial freedom, this is your chance! Go here to learn more and start creating your successful digital course!***

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 07, 2020
#334: 4 Incredible ‘First Launch’ Success Stories
33:07

There’s often a misconception that you have to launch many times before you really start to generate significant revenue. While that may have been the story at one point and time, I’ve seen my students debunk that myth over and over again using the Digital Course Academy framework. 

Today, I’m going to share four inspiring first launch stories from my students.

You’re going to hear about:

My hope is that you walk away from this episode knowing that if you have the desire in your heart to create a course and if you’re willing to do the work, you can generate significant revenue in under a year.

This episode is brought to you by Acuity Scheduling, a scheduling platform that will help you to book more clients, get paid on time, and automate and organize your business’ day-to-day tasks. For a limited time only, you can get 45 days of Acuity Scheduling absolutely free -- no credit card required. Click here to automate your schedule!

This episode is also brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little…funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Sep 03, 2020
Official Trailer: Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield
03:11

How do I start an online business? Grow my email list to thousands of subscribers? Sell more and grow faster? These are just some of the big questions that leading online marketing strategist, Amy Porterfield, digs into on the top-ranked Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast. In addition to mini marketing masterclasses and step-by-step guides, each episode is designed to help you take immediate action on the most important strategies for starting, scaling, and automating your online business. Amy’s specialty is getting into the online trenches with you. Thinking about creating an online course? Want to promote with webinars? Need help with your Facebook ads? Discover why hundreds of thousands of online business owners turn to Amy Porterfield to generate more profits and to make sense of the online marketing space, implement the strategies that really get results, and turn that side hustle into a business that lasts.

***

For more episodes, show notes, and transcripts, please visit https://www.amyporterfield.com/amy-porterfield-podcast/

For more about Amy Porterfield, please go to https://www.amyporterfield.com/

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.” <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 28, 2020
#333: $70k In 7 Days: How She Did It With Gayneté Jones
55:19

$70,000 in just 7 days with one webinar. Can it be done??? Yes, my friend, it can be. 

My guest in this episode, Gayneté Jones, made it possible! Gayneté guides millennial women to turn their passion into profit and create a life of fulfillment and freedom. She’s been featured in many well-known publications and, in this episode, she takes us behind the scenes of her successful six-figure launch

She shares:

  • What worked during her launch and webinar (AND...what didn’t)
  • Step-by-step strategies that she used to fill up her webinar
  • Tangible launch mindset hacks 

And so much more. You’re going to love Gayneté’s launch strategies and hacks!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 27, 2020
#332: What Kind Of Course Is Best For Your Business
23:59

Not all digital courses are created equal.

There’s a Signature Course, a Spotlight Coursen, and a Starter Course. All are different and unique in their own way and all can work well for different entrepreneurs and online businesses.

In this episode, I share a student story about each course type. I talk about…

  • Why the specific course type worked best for their business
  • The successes that they had with this course 
  • How it fits into their business like a puzzle piece

Plus, I even share a little advice and guidance for other entrepreneurs thinking about creating a course. 

If you’re not sure what type of digital course would work best for your business, this episode is for you!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

 

Aug 20, 2020
#331: 6 Figures & 5 Babies: How She Did it with Only 3 Hours a Day
51:07

Meet Andrea Olson, one of my amazing students and a fierce “Mom-preneur” with a mission and a successful online business.

She made over $600,000 in her business last year by committing to no more than four-hour workdays -- with the exception of her launch days.

She teaches moms how to utilize a system called the “Elimination Communication” approach for potty training with her Go Diaper Free Program.

In this episode, we chat about how she sets up her business in a way that only requires part-time hours to run smoothly, her secret sauce, and the one thing she feels has made her so successful.

We talk about her first hire, some of the strategies she uses for growing her email list by 100 to 150 subscribers per day, and so much more.

This episode is brought to you by Acuity Scheduling, a scheduling platform that will help you to book more clients, get paid on time, and automate and organize your business’ day-to-day tasks. For a limited time only, you can get 45 days of Acuity Scheduling absolutely free -- no credit card required. Click here to automate your schedule!

This episode is also brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 13, 2020
#330: How To Stop Playing Small with Brit Barron
35:27

In today’s episode, I chat with my good friend, Brit Barron, who just released her very first book. And let me tell ya, it’s so freakin’ good! 

It’s called WORTH IT: Overcome Your Fears And Embrace The Life You Were Made For. This book shares stories from Brit’s life -- such as going from being a megachurch pastor to coming out and leaving the church, her experience of being a Black woman in America, and other experiences that illustrate how she was living fearfully inside of a framework that someone else had created. 

She so bravely shows her story of growth and also challenges her readers to break out of their own box and step into who they are meant to be.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

 

Aug 10, 2020
#329: How 3 Entrepreneurs Found Success Serving A Small Niche Audience
01:17:17

In today's episode, I chat with three of my students about how they built successful businesses in industries with underrepresented communities.

These conversations are sooooooo important because many people believe that niching down can be a dangerous thing -- but these three successes are here to show you that this just isn’t the case. In fact, niching down can be the opposite!

And while it may be scary at first to venture into these unknown territories, you’ll often find that when you start to attract the right people, they’ll be saying, “This is what I’ve been waiting for!”

So today, you’re going to hear from Sandra McLemore, Gwen Lane, and LeeAnn Sims.

They all have a unique community and will share how they identified that something was missing. They’ll also share the self-limiting beliefs they faced and how they attracted and built their audience. And of course, they’ll share about their successes, too.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Aug 06, 2020
#328: 10 Unexpected Digital Course Topics That Will Inspire You Into Action
27:10

In my 10+ years of being a digital course creator, I’ve seen a course for everything under the sun! From sourdough bread making to retirement planning, and everything in between -- I’ve seen it all!

And this just reaffirms my belief that everyone has a digital course in them.

In this episode, I’ll share 10 fascinating examples of digital courses to get your creative juices flowing. Plus, I even give you some rapid-fire questions to help you get clear on topics that you could use for a digital course. 

If you’re dreaming of becoming an online entrepreneur but aren’t sure what to focus on, this episode will help you get hyper-clear on a digital course topic so you can start bringing your dream to life!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 30, 2020
#327: Stop Leaving $$ On The Table -- Add A Digital Course To Your Biz (Here’s How!)
40:29

Want to know what I love most about a digital course?

I love that they can literally be added to almost any business and that once you create your first digital course you set the foundation for something you can sell over and over again with just a few tweaks and updates!

And that’s exactly what I’m laying out for you in this episode -- how to add a digital course to your existing business so that you can boost your revenue, free up your time, and build a business that works for you and not the other way around.

If you’re a coach, consultant, service provider, online entrepreneur, or have a membership site, I have specific examples of just how to take what you offer, put it into a course, and sell it to reach more people and make more of an impact.

I also give you my three profitable course types along with real-life examples of what type works best for each business structure.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 23, 2020
#326: My Top 10 Digital Course Mistakes (And How To Avoid Them)
52:05

It’s hard to believe it, but I’ve been creating digital courses for 10 years now! And along the way, I’ve succeeded, I’ve failed, and I’ve definitely tripped a time or two.

In this episode, I share 10 mistakes that I’ve made in my 10 years of digital course creation in hopes that you can learn from me, avoid these same mistakes, and build a thriving business quickly!

Everything from not finding my sweet spot to getting stuck in perfectionism to holding onto tasks far longer than I needed to -- these all made the list. And I hope you find my lessons learned helpful as you navigate the world of online business and digital courses.

This episode is brought to you by Acuity Scheduling, a scheduling platform that will help you to book more clients, get paid on time, and automate and organize your business’ day-to-day tasks. For a limited time only, you can get 45 days of Acuity Scheduling absolutely free -- no credit card required. Click here to automate your schedule!

This episode is also brought to you by the Full Focus Planner. The only planner that helps me stay organized, focused, and on track to succeed. With their “Daily Big 3” and annual goal-setting prompts, I keep my goals top of mind, and my actions aligned with what’s most important. Join me in making 2020 the best year yet! Head here to grab your planner.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 16, 2020
#325: How To Avoid These Two Common Launching Pitfalls with Tasha Booth
40:06

What if I told you that there are two common pitfalls that you -- as a course creator -- should be very careful to avoid?

Would you be interested in finding out what they are? Well, my friend, you’re in luck because my guest is going to share the deets and how to avoid getting tripped up by them.

Her name is Tasha Booth and she is the Founder and CEO of The Launch Guild, an Online Business Management & Digital Marketing Implementation Agency.

In this episode, we chat about those common pitfalls, personal touchpoints that you can use to boost your revenue (very doable!), and how to use a beta launch to validate your course idea and content. 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 09, 2020
#324: Email List Growth Strategies That Will Transform Your Business
32:41

Email list growth is just something you’ll never stop doing! Attracting new ideal audience members to your email list to nurture them and eventually turn them into devoted customers should be a priority as a new or veteran entrepreneur.

To help you out, I’m sharing three foolproof list growth strategies. Whether you’re still working on hitting your first 250 subscribers or you have a few thousand on your list, you’ll find these strategies extremely doable and effective.

The first one ties into Search Engine Optimization and how to use it on your website, the second is a social media strategy, and the third is an approach you can use to get your website visitors onto your email list.

I’ve even included a little bonus strategy at the end of the episode.

Check out how this episode plays out...

  • [04:42] Strategy #1: I share a super simple Search Engine Optimization (SEO) strategy to boost your website traffic and gain new leads. No SEO experience required to make this subscriber growth strategy work!
  • [11:56] Strategy #2: Find your ICA on Facebook and make an effort to get to know them. Facebook groups are a great way to find and attract new customers -- so long as you approach it in a genuine way. I walk you through step-by-step how to use this strategy!
  • [19:57] Strategy #3: Use website pop-ups to get new subscribers on your list. Done right, this works like a charm! Use them in a way that resonates with your ideal customer.
  • [26:22] Bonus Strategy: Add an opt-in link for your lead magnet to your email signature. Think about all of the emails that you and your team send. This is a great way to turn warm leads into email subscribers.

Get your free resource here!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jul 02, 2020
#323: How Healthy Is Your Email List? 4 Metrics To Track
29:05

Entrepreneur PSA: Tracking your email metrics is an important task that you need to be making time for!

Okay, I know that may not seem like the most exciting public service announcement you’ve ever heard but hear me out. If you’ve been looking to grow and improve the health of your email list, the answers and guidance you’re looking for could be hiding in the metrics housed on your email service provider.

Now, I know that you might be unsure as to what your metrics mean and which ones to pay attention to, which is why, in this episode, I break down exactly how to track your email metrics and set goals according to your industry averages.

I know you’re going to find this episode invaluable. It’s going to give you the confidence and knowledge to keep growing that priceless email list of yours.

Here’s a sneak peek of this episode...

  • [03:30] First things first, let’s chat about your email open rate. This is the percentage of people who open your email. Different Industries have different open rates, so when you’re identifying where your open rate should be, make sure you compare to your industry average. Check out this article to pinpoint what that is.
  • [05:33] If you want to improve your email open rate -- get creative with your subject headlines. Here are a few ways to do that!
  • [07:36] The next metric of importance is your click-through rate -- the percentage of people who opened your email and took action by clicking a link. I share some tips to improve this metric.
  • [12:02] Next, let’s discuss the conversion rate. This is the percentage of people who click through and take action on your offer or request. This is yet again, another important metric.
  • [21:33] In order to get people to go from email subscribers to customers, you have to nurture them with every email you send. Here are some tangible ways to improve your email conversion rate.
  • [23:33] Last, but certainly not least, you’ll want to pay attention to your unsubscribe rate. This is the percentage of people who unsubscribe after receiving an email from you. Listen, you’ll always have unsubscribers, and to be honest, they probably weren’t a good fit for your business. However, once you get hyper clear on who you’re serving and stay in your lane -- you’ll start to see this number drop.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 29, 2020
#322: How To Build Your Email List from the Ground Up
57:17

There are two things that go hand in hand: being an entrepreneur and having an email list. Eleven years into my business, this is something I know for sure.

And despite the necessity of an email list, I still hear objections like…

  • “I don’t know where to start.”
  • “I want to wait until I have more followers.”
  • “There’s too much tech set up.”

Whenever I hear these objections, I shrug it off, knowing that each one can be debunked -- which is exactly what I do in this episode.

Not only do I debunk these objections, but I also tell you the 3-piece recipe you need to start your email list and your first step to create a thriving list.

My hope is that, from this episode, you’ll gain the knowledge and confidence you need to get your email list up and running within one week of listening to this episode (or less)!

Let’s check it out...

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 25, 2020
#321: Untapped Strategies To Grow Your Email List & Your Business with Neil Patel
30:26

Are you ready to make list building mistakes a thing of the past so you can become an email list master?

Well, my friend, I have just the guy to help you do so. Neil Patel, top online marketer, entrepreneur, and best selling author is going to share three of the most email marketing mistakes made by entrepreneurs.

And, of course, he doesn’t stop there. He also goes on to share how to avoid these mistakes and, instead, how to improve your email marketing game and successfully grow your list.

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

  • The biggest mistake that people are making right now with their email list is focusing on the size of their list. The truth is if your list isn't engaging, the size of it doesn't matter. Scrub your list and remove people who don't open or engage.
  • Growing your list is always a challenge. Respond to comments on blogs, groups, and social sites by helping people. When you point people to your helpful resources, you can grow your list while engaging and helping new subscribers. 
  • Learn to sell every once in a while. You need to put offers out there, so your audience doesn't think it's always free all of the time. You can sell even if your list is small. It will add up. 
  • Free tools convert really well for list signups. If you don't have your own tool, you can find something to use at CodeCanyon. Tools convert best. Then journeys, ebooks, and general newsletter optins. Blocking off a portion of your content for subscribers only is also a tactic that converts. 
  • You can share a journey by allowing your subscribers to follow you as you create something like a new course and then share your results. Share your goal, get subscribers, and let them follow your journey through your posts and content. 
  • An email capture system refers to your process to capture emails. You can do so through multiple ways like a tool, newsletter, quiz, and more. You want to create a system with different paths for different personality types to subscribe.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 22, 2020
#320: 5-Steps To Make Your Marketing More Inclusive With Sonia Thompson
57:46

In this episode, I chat with expert marketing strategies, marketing consultant, podcast host, CEO of a media group, and all-around amazing human being, Sonia Thompson.

Sonia shares her 5-step approach for creating a more inclusive business and company culture. Plus, she gives actionable strategies that you can start implementing right away.

Here’s a peek at her 5-steps:

  • Diversify your circle of influence
  • Re-evaluate your ICA
  • Commit to representation
  • Make cultural intelligence a priority
  • Audit your customer experience

Click here to listen!

This episode is brought to you by Boosted, an app for iOS or Android that allows you to make beautiful, professional-looking videos for your brand’s social media in three easy steps! You can use stock videos, your own videos, or even create stunning videos with your photos. With top-notch templates, easy resizing, and user-friendly video editing options, Boosted can take your social to the next level. Head here to get the discounted rate of $15 for 3 months of Boosted Premium, which offers bonus features to make your videos stand out!

This episode is also brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.” <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 18, 2020
#319: Facebook Group Engagement: Strategies You Need To Know
28:28

Facebook groups, you gotta love them. And as an entrepreneur, you gotta have one!

Especially during the COVID-19 crisis, people are spending more time online looking for the answers and guidance they need, and one place they are looking is on Facebook.

This means, if you don’t have a Facebook group, you could be missing out on potential customers and loyal audience members.

Or, maybe you’ve started a group, but you’re struggling to engage your members. Either way, you’re going to love this episode and walk away with tons of ideas to get your group rockin’ and rollin’.

I have over 38 thousand members between my free and paid Facebook groups, so I know a thing or two about what works and what doesn’t. In this episode, I spill it all!

We’re going to talk about my favorite tips and tricks for setting a Facebook group up, engaging your members, and ensuring you don’t hear crickets when you post.

Here’s what I talk about…

  • [06:17] It’s important to define your group focus and who your group is for. You gotta do this because it helps you to find clarity in the direction of your group and content.
  • [09:24] Always, always, always make your group private! Why? Because it makes your group more intimate and allows you to have more control.
  • [11:11] Have fun and use the “ask questions” feature to make sure applicants know your rules and to find out more about your members. I personally like to ask the “magic wand” question, which helps me to learn what topic my audience wants to hear. You can also use this section to gather emails!
  • [13:08] Mention your Facebook group everywhere to get new members.
  • [15:55] Get used to showing up consistently in your group -- this is the difference between winning or losing. Map out a content calendar for your Facebook group. Decide how often you are going to post and how often you are going to go in and comment and make sure you schedule these tasks into your weekly planner.
  • [21:59] Do a weekly or monthly Facebook Live. Not sure what to talk about? You can do Q & As, storytime, hot seats, or a cocktail hour! Pay attention to how your group resonates and keep doing what's working.

Also, I wanted to make sure that you have everything you need to get started with a Facebook group. Click here to grab my free step-by-step guide to setting up your group.

This free resource is also for those who already have a group as it has some tips that will improve your group’s searchability, boundaries, and organization.

This episode is brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little...funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

This episode is also brought to you by Leadpages. Whether you’re growing your email list or your business, Leadpages will make your life easier. Leadpages lets you can create hassle-free opt-in pages, thank you pages, webinar replay pages, websites and more. Plus, their built-in marketing advice and conversion tools minimize tech confusion so you can focus on the important stuff in your business -- like engaging your audience. Turn your content into clicks and customers with Leadpages. Start a free 14-day trial and save 20% on your first purchase at Leadpages.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 15, 2020
#318: Becoming an Imperfect Ally with Erica Courdae
01:07:52

I’m so excited for my guest today, Diversity, Equality, and Inclusion Consultant, Erica Courdae.

Erica has dedicated her life to expanding how others interact with the world through powerful conversations. Her work as an entrepreneur and coach has taken her across the country, onto stages, and into communities as a key speaker and educator. 

Erica brought some serious honesty and truth to this interview and shared so much eye-opening insight around…

  • How to show up as an imperfect ally
  • The power of listening and apologizing over defending and deflecting
  • Tone-policing and why it’s harmful to the BLM movement
  • How to diversify your business and adjust your values to support equality and inclusion
  • And so much more.

This episode is a very public, “behind-the-scenes” look into my beginnings of allyship and I invite all my listeners to keep me accountable as I continue this journey.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 11, 2020
#317b: How To Do A Step-by-Step Mid-Year Goal Audit
31:32

I think we can all agree that the first six months of 2020 have been crazy, uncertain, and have pushed us in ways that we never expected -- especially as entrepreneurs.

Nonetheless, six months have passed and we’re now halfway through the year. So from one friend to another, how are your 2020 goals coming along?

Maybe you’re kicking butt -- go you! Or, perhaps you’re falling behind a bit. Given the COVID-19 pandemic, just know that you’re not alone, so give yourself some grace.

COVID or no COVID, I always find doing a mid-year goal audit helpful. It’s important to recalibrate where you are with our goals to ensure they’re on track and realistic.

In this episode, I have a 4-step process to help you reach your goals in the final six months of 2020 -- no matter where you are right now.

Here’s what it looks like:

  • Identify your goals -- get hyper clear on what they are and refresh your memory.
  • Examine your progress and list out the actions you’ve been taking towards your goals.
  • Identify what’s working and what isn’t.
  • Create a plan for moving forward and knocking your goals out of the ballpark.

You’re going to walk away with a renewed sense of motivation and a step-by-step process to help ensure you accomplish those big, bold goals.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here , scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Jun 01, 2020
#317: 6-Steps To Craft A Money Magnet Offer
36:42

You have something to offer your audience -- that special sauce that people are looking for and need. So, friend, how are you going to get it into their hands?

The answer? By crafting an irresistible offer that your audience cannot resist.

What is an offer? An offer is a product or service that you sell through your business. This could be a digital course, a PDF guide, one-on-one or group coaching... the list goes on.

After 11 years of growing a successful online business, I can promise you that having only one offer is what will set you up for success.

This episode will walk you through my 6-step process for taking what you have to offer, and packaging it into something that your audience will love and buy!

Here’s the 6-step process for crafting an offer that your audience won’t be able to resist:

  1. Define your offer promise.
  2. Identify the length of time it takes to see a transformation.
  3. Map the path or step-by-step journey it requires to get this transformation.
  4. Select your offer format.
  5. Price your offer.
  6. Craft your money-back guarantee.

And trust me, this approach to creating your offer or package makes it really simple to put it together so you can get it in the hands of your audience quickly.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 28, 2020
#316: How To Grow Your Email List Using Social Media
41:26

After 11 years of building a successful online business, there is one area I see entrepreneurs go wrong time and time again.

Want to know what it is?

They put all their effort into growing their social media following without properly using it to grow their email list. In my experience, that’s a big no, no.

So, why would that be a big mistake?

Well, here are a couple of stats I want to share with you.

  • Your return on investment with an email list is 4x higher than any other marketing platform. In fact, the average ROI is 122%.
  • For every one dollar spent on email marketing, you could make between forty-five to fifty-one dollars.

You do not, and I repeat, do not own your social media followers. You do, however, own your email list. This means that a social media platform can take your followers away at any point, or dictate who does and does not see your content.

Do I have your attention yet?

I’m not saying you should ditch social media. Instead, I’m giving you simple, effective strategies for utilizing your social media accounts to grow your email list, share your knowledge with the world, and support your audience in the best way possible.

To help me do this, I reached out to a couple of experts you may know, Jasmine Star (Instagram expert) and Brittany Krystle (LinkedIn expert), for a little guidance.

In this episode, Jasmine shares her favorite ways to invite Instagram followers over to your email list. Brittany gives little known tips and tricks for converting your LinkedIn followers to email subscribers.

And yours truly -- that’s me -- is going to share some of the most effective ways to use Facebook to grow your email list.

You’re going to love these tangible, step-by-step strategies for growing your email list quickly.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 21, 2020
#315: 5 Ways To Use TikTok To Reach More Customers (No Dancing Required) with Elise Darma
51:37

We can no longer ignore the newest social media platform, TikTok. And, I’d be lying if I said that I haven’t been intrigued by it. After all, if it’s good enough for Reese Witherspoon and Will Smith, it’s good enough for me.

But I wanted to know more. So, I turned to Instagram educator and TikTok early adopter, Elise Darma, to educate me.

In today’s episode, Elise and I talk about:

  • What TikTok is.
  • Why you, as an entrepreneur, should be using and paying attention to TikTok.
  • How to get your first one thousand followers on TikTok, and, how to get them onto your email list.
  • Plus, 5 TikTok video ideas that you can start using right away.

Elise has been featured in Forbes, Entrepreneur, Elite Daily, and The Everygirl. She knows her stuff when it comes to social media. I can’t wait for you to learn her step-by-step approach to getting started with and using TikTok to attract new customers.

You’ll walk away from today’s episode with a new tool in your marketing pocket, and ready to dominate a hot new platform.

And because Elise is going to share exact examples of what she’s done to see traction on TikTok, we’ve put together a free resource so you can visually see what we’re talking about.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here , scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 14, 2020
#314b: From Rejection to a 1.2 Billion Dollar Entrepreneur with Jamie Kern Lima
56:45

A lot of people look at a billion-dollar company with starstruck eyes and forget that, in most cases, it took someone a lot of persistence, resilience, and tenacity to get there.

And, yes, I have a specific company in mind.

I’m referring to IT Cosmetics, a billion-dollar makeup company. In this episode, I sit down and talk to the founder, Jamie Kern Lima.

I am so honored to have my friend join me and bring inspiration and tangible guidance on how to build a successful company from the ground up.

Jamie has a motivating story and she is an example of hard work, determination, and persistence. On top of that, she has a heart of gold.

Jamie shares her journey of being a successful entrepreneur and how she handled hearing “no” over and over again.

She talked about following your intuition, showing up authentically, and some of her top needle movers when she was building a billion-dollar business.

Here's a peek at the episode...

  • [05:15] Jamie shares about her struggles with her skin, which a television anchor, made her feel self-conscious. After struggling to find a makeup that actually stuck, she was inspired to create her own.
  • [07:53] And that’s exactly what she did! On the flight back from her honeymoon, she and husband wrote up a business plan for a skincare line that catered to women who didn’t have perfect skin.
  • [11:41] “When you're doing something really new and really novel, all of the experts may not get it.” When no one would pick up her product, she went back to the drawing board and decided to sell it online.
  • [13:42] Although they were struggling to get traction, Jamie persisted because she knew in her gut that she was supposed to do this.
  • [17:07] In true Jamie fashion, she kept hustling -- even after a heartwrenching “no” from Sephora.
  • [20:59] Jamie shares how she was turned down by QVC seven years ago, and today they are the largest selling brand on QVC.
  • [27:01] “Don't dilute your own authenticity. Nobody can be you, and it doesn't serve you to be anybody else.”
  • [39:11] When she finally landed a spot on QVC, she sold out! Tune in to hear her story.
  • [42:55] Jamie shares one of her biggest mistakes of growing a billion-dollar company.
  • [50:08] She also shares some of her best needle movers while building such a successful brand.

I know you’re going to fall in love with Jamie and find so much value in her expert advice and guidance.

Side note: If you reach out to Jamie on Instagram, be sure to tag her handle in the first few words of your post’s comments.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here , scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 11, 2020
#314: Become The Most Decisive Person You Know
31:09

Can I let you in on a little secret? If you become a decisive entrepreneur early on in your journey, it’s going to serve you in the long run.

How do I know? Because I’ve been in the game for twelve years now, and I’d say that’s long enough to feel like I’ve made enough decisions to last me a lifetime.

I have a question for you, do you consider yourself to be a decisive person? If you answered “no,” that’s totally fine.

To be honest, I’ve always been a pretty decisive person (just like my mom!). But being an entrepreneur has helped me to take a step back and to examine my process for making educated decisions with confidence.

My hope for you is that whether you’re decisive or not, you take my simple and effective 4-step decision-making process, and you use it to make big, bold decisions that will best serve you, your business, and your audience.

Step one in my 4-step process is to commit already! Give yourself to commit to making a decision… even if it’s the wrong one, which sometimes, it will be.

My second step is to find out what it is that you need to learn and what information you need to make an educated decision. But I say this with caution because I know first-hand that it’s too easy to fall down the research rabbit hole. To avoid that, set a timer (I know it sounds silly, but I’m serious!). Don’t let research draw out making a decision!

My third step is to talk it out with someone, but be mindful of who you ask. After all, I firmly believe that you are the best person to make the final decision in your business.

And last, but certainly not least, the last step is to go inward. Now, of course, I couldn’t say this without giving you a step-by-step of how to do just that. So, I’ve laid out how I personally like to go inward so that I can gain clarity around my decision.

Here's what I talk about in this episode...

  • [04:21] What if you didn’t think about decisions as either good or bad? Here’s what to do instead. When a decision leads you to your desired results, keep going. When it doesn't, change your path and make a new decision!
  • [08:40] Commit to making as many decisions as needed to get the results you're after. Tune in to find out how I enter into an experimental phase and welcome input and feedback from those I trust and respect. After all, I firmly believe it's better to decide then to keep waiting for the right decision.
  • [16:16] Only do the necessary research to make your decision and nothing more. Ask what information you need to gather to make a competent decision and then find the right resources. Oh, and be sure to set a deadline or timeframe!
  • [17:25] Selectively and cautiously seek input from people who you trust and understand what's going on in your business. Ask yourself: Who will give you candid input? Who will be skewed because they love you?
  • [20:24] Get quiet and turn inward for the ultimate decision. You are the best person to make the final call in your business.
  • [24:39] I find it’s helpful to journal on these questions: What's best for the company? What's best for me? What feels right? What aligns with my intent, mission, and vision? What would I do if I were brave?

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here , scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 07, 2020
#313b: Shift Your Selling Mindset with Lisa Sasevich
37:44

Wouldn’t it be fun to share your gifts with the world and make a ton of money while doing it?

You’re probably thinking, “Well, Amy, uh yeah…obviously!”

So why do I hear -- all the time -- that to be an entrepreneur, it's so much harder than just getting paid to share your gifts?

My guest today, Lisa Sasevich, is going to set the record straight. She's going to share just how to use your gifts to boost your sales so that you can make the revenue you desire.

Lisa -- a.k.a. “Queen of Conversions” -- is an award-winning entrepreneur and business coach, and she just released her new book, “Meant For More.”

Why is this book important to read as an entrepreneur?

Because Lisa has put all of her top tips and tools into one place so that you can hone in on your unique gifts and use them to build a thriving business.

In this episode, Lisa and I chat about her easy-to-use, proven formula for understanding how to use your gifts to make more money, have more impact, and get more out of life.

What I love most about her step-by-step formula (besides that it’s step-by-step), is that it teaches you how to do all of this without being pushy or salesy. Instead, it shows you how to speak from the heart with intention, honesty, and truth.

Here's a look at what we chatted about...

  • [04:46] As a pioneer in the online marketing world, Lisa wanted to integrate her passion and her work. She's now known as the “Queen of Conversion” and has taught over 15,000 clients to create an irresistible offer without being pushy or salesy.
  • [09:41] Lisa shares a powerful story about losing her mom and how that inspired her to avoid living a “woulda, coulda, shoulda” life, and instead figure out what she was put here to do.
  • [12:07] We talk about finding your “unique value,” what it is, and how to use it as an entrepreneur.
  • [16:37] In her Meant For More book, there is a proven formula to turn your knowledge into profits. And because you know I love a good formula, Lisa and I chat about how to utilize it as an entrepreneur to make more money doing what you love.
  • [23:18] Lisa shares an unexpected way to identify something you’re good at. Hint… it has to do with meddling!
  • [24:34] She also talks about identifying a topic that people want to pick your brain about, and how this is a clue towards your million dollar value.
  • [25:52] Her five-step Meant For More Sales process is to make peace with sales, claim your million-dollar value, get specific about taking action, turn it into an irresistible offer, and lay out the plan to live a life you love.

You’re going to love this episode. Plus, Lisa has a free mini-course on how to discover your unique value. Head here to grab her freebie and discover your unique value today!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

May 04, 2020
#313: How To Find The Right Business Mentor
28:41

“A mentor is someone who sees more talent and ability within you than you see in yourself, and helps bring it out of you.” - Bob Proctor

Amen, Mr. Proctor!

I am a firm believer in studying and learning from mentors who have gone before you and have succeeded and created a life and business similar to the one you dream of creating.

When I was first starting out, I relied on and invested in mentors to support me with the step-by-step guidance they’ve used to achieve results.

And the truth is, I still do to this day!

It’s important to find a mentor who aligns with your vision and the goals that you have set for your business.

In this episode, I talk about…

  • why mentors are important during every season of your business
  • the golden number of mentors you should study and learn from
  • the difference between working with a mentor one-on-one, in a mastermind, or online through a course they offer
  • how to know which one is best for you and your business

Here’s what this episode is all about...

  • [04:11] I get it! When starting out, it's so easy to follow 100 or more people you admire and consider each and every one a mentor. But here’s my tip to you (coming from years of experience), you want to keep it simple and keep your mentors to a minimum to build a successful business.
  • [06:52] Having only two or three mentors allows you to build trust and cultivate relationships with these people. Taking advice from too many mentors will stunt your business growth.
  • [08:59] Having trouble narrowing it down? Don’t worry, I have a little guidance for you. Write a list of all the people who you believe are your mentors and all the people you admire. Decide who on the list has succeeded at creating a life and a business that you would like to create. Start eliminating names, so you are left with only a few people who truly align with your business desires and goals.
  • [10:52] Once you have your list of potential mentors, study from them and learn from them. Let their guidance, their content, their tools, and courses guide you.
  • [15:40] You’re probably wondering about working with a mentor. And, to be honest, that’s one of the best things I could possibly do as an entrepreneur. I’ve found that there are benefits to group masterminds and working one-on-one with a coach. When working one-on-one, you'll have an opportunity to identify tasks specific to your vision. However, it can be expensive. I suggest you do a digital course first and then decide if you want to take it one step further with one-on-one coaching.
  • [19:50] I’ve found that masterminds are especially beneficial later on in your business. Paying for it when you have skin in the game is a whole new experience -- trust me. What I love most about masterminds is that you get feedback and ideas from other like-minded individuals. A mastermind can truly offer you so much clarity as an entrepreneur.

Finding the right mentor in such a busy world is essential and empowering, but it can also be frustrating if you aren’t sure what to look for!

To take the overwhelm out of finding a mentor who is going to guide you and show you a seamless step-by-step approach to succeeding in your industry, I’ve put together a freebie with five questions to help you get hyper clear on who is a good fit.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.” <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 30, 2020
#312b: The Things You SHOULD Be Saying Yes To
26:36

I almost said “no” to one of the biggest opportunities I’ve ever had, and it would have cost me playing a bigger game as I had committed to.

If you’ve been with me for a while, you know that in 2019 I committed to playing a bigger game, and yet here I was, in 2019, contemplating shooting down an opportunity that allowed me to do just that.

Woah! What the heck was I thinking? Tune in to find out if I actually played a bigger game. Spoiler alert… I did!

In this episode, I’m talking about the opportunities, the kind that we all get, that are scary, exciting, and provide us with the breakthroughs we need to accomplish our goals and jumpstart a life and business that we dream of.

I want you to look out for those opportunities, and even though they may seem terrifying… I want you to have the courage to say “yes” to them.

And while it isn’t as easy as one, two, three, I do have three steps for you to take when you encounter those opportunities to help you find the courage, confidence, and grit to say “yes,” play a bigger game, and step into the big deal that you are.

  • Step 1: Ask yourself, “What’s the worst thing that could happen if I take this opportunity?”
  • Step 2: Share it with someone who truly knows your goals and aspirations.
  • Step 3: Test your reason against fear!

Here’s a glimpse of the episode...

  • [05:39] My friend and boss babe, Rachel Hollis, challenged me to speak at her RISE event. And get this, she wanted me to talk about my weight loss journey instead of online marketing! Here’s where it gets interesting, my friend, I wanted to pretend this opportunity was never presented to me. My team, however, had a very different idea
  • [12:50] Well, I ended up saying “yes.” And once I did, I felt all of the emotions, including a teeny bit of courage. Here’s what I did next, I felt into my courage so much so that it snuffed out all of my other emotions. The experience ended up being incredible and exactly what I needed to play a bigger game.
  • [15:39] Believe it or not, this was an opportunity that gave me direction and courage to step into my full potential. It was truly the evidence that I needed to confirm that I was capable of going big.
  • [16:27] Has there been an opportunity that you've been shying away from because it seems intimidating? Or because you don't feel you're ready? Here’s what I want you to do, I want you to open that door and explore that opportunity.
  • [19:46] Can you think of an opportunity right now that is just waiting for you to say “yes?” If you can't think of anything, be open-minded and watch for one. I have a sneaky feeling it will find you sooner than you think.
  • [20:29] When you land on the opportunity, try sitting with it. Ask yourself, “What's the worst that could happen. What's the best thing that could happen?” Allow yourself to dream big so that you can start playing a bigger game.

I hope you take the lessons from this episode and apply them to your life and business right away, so this can be the year that you step into your greatest potential!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 27, 2020
#312: Launch With A Tiny Audience with Stu McLaren
45:55

What if I told you that there is a fast-track strategy that you can use to launch a digital course or a membership site. Would you be interested?

And here’s the cherry on top… you don’t have to have a big audience or list to make this approach successful. 

I know. Crazy town, right? While it seems too good to be true, my guest today is going to prove that it can be done, and he has the exact steps to do it. 

My guest is Stu McLaren, and it’s not his first time on the show. You might remember him from episode #260, where we spoke all about membership sites.

In this episode, Stu shares a mind-blowing strategy called the “Founding Members Strategy,” which allows you to successfully launch your product or service with a tiny audience. 

He is going to tell you…

  • Exactly how to use this strategy.
  • How it will benefit you and your audience. 
  • Five elements to make this strategy successful.
  • Real-life stories of how this has successfully played out in the lives of some of his students -- students whose audiences range from tiny to large.

Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve got your business down pat, you’re going to love his step-by-step strategy that you can start using right away. 

We also chat about Stu’s phenomenal 3-part video workshop all about turning what you know, love, and do into a profitable membership. 

You’re in luck because today Stu releases the first video where he talks about the “old” way of doing business versus the “new” way of doing business, which means recurring revenue and customers. 

Click here to grab this eye-opening video and to get signed up for the 3-part video workshop!

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.” <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 23, 2020
#311: 4 Steps To Identify Your Million Dollar Niche
24:47

Raise your hand if you get tripped up defining your niche with full confidence. Well, my friend, you’re not alone.

I hear it all the time from entrepreneurs … “I feel stuck because I’m just not certain what my niche is!”

I’m here to tell you that this is about to become a thing of the past, and after you’re done with this episode, you’ll be feeling hyper clear about the niche you are serving.

In this episode, I walk you through a highly-effective four-step process for identifying your niche. (I even made you a freebie to make it easy to follow!)

Before I take you through this actionable, tangible step-by-step process, I have to address the elephant in the room.

Fear of actually picking a niche!

Whoa, talk about diving right in… am I right?!

I know that this fear is alive and well because I hear about it and see it all the time in my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community. The bummer is that for many entrepreneurs -- especially those just starting out -- that fear of picking one niche is enough to stay stuck in decision paralysis.

“Choosing the wrong niche is better than choosing no niche at all.” - James Wedmore

What’s most important for you to know is that you might pick the wrong niche right away, and that’s okay because it will at least get you moving forward -- and forward action means progress and clarity.

This four-step process is going to take a little elbow grease, so get ready to put pen to paper. But I promise you the work is going to be worth it, and the clarity you’ll gain will catapult you to the next level in your business.

  • In step 1, you’ll identify your main market.
  • In step 2, you’ll niche down and get really specific. (And trust me, the more specific, the better!)
  • In step 3, you’ll do some market research.
  • In step 4, you’ll create your Value Articulator Statement.

Say goodbye to niche confusion or feeling stuck. I want you to declare right here, right now, that you are going to pick a niche, even if it feels scary.

And because I know there is a lot of action steps in this episode, I’ve put together a little freebie that will take you through each step in detail. Grab your freebie here!

This episode is brought to you by Paleovalley, my family's go-to source for healthy, high-protein snacks. Paleovalley’s grass-fed and finished beef sticks are my family's favorite snacks to keep us healthy and full on the go. Head here to check out all of their high-quality, organic products and be sure to use the code Amy15 to get 15% off of your first order.

This episode is also brought to you by the Lead to Win podcast, a podcast by two of my favorite leadership experts, Michael Hyatt and Megan Hyatt Miller. Lead to Win helps you to minimize overwhelm and navigate the complexities of being a leader so you can win at work and succeed in your life. If you’re ready to cut through distractions and focus on your greatest priorities, check out Lead to Win today! Head here to subscribe and listen.

Rate & Review Online Marketing Made Easy:

If you're on Apple Podcasts, help me help more people by rating and reviewing my show. Reviews let others - just like you - find the actionable, step-by-step strategies to start the "online" journey...of making a business and life they love. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review.” My team and I - we read them all. Thank you!

Apr 16, 2020
BONUS: From Working At Home To Launching During A Crisis: Your Questions Answered (COVID-19 Series)
42:51

Holy cow, there is A LOT of uncertainty right now. And we all have a lot of questions. First, you are not alone. Second, to continue to support you and your business during the coronavirus crisis, I’ve connected with the members of my free Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook group and I’ve asked them: “what questions do you have about navigating your business?”

My students gave me dozens of wonderful questions that I know will also help you. As you pivot to find the right way to move your online and small business forward during COVID-19, consider the questions I answer in this episode. They are:

  • I have yet to launch a course. Do you feel this is a good time to do so, or should I stay focused on list building and relationship building with weekly content?
  • I’ve been crafting and getting ready to share my business with the world, and then COVID-19 hit. Should I postpone launching my business and sharing it with others until we start to see some normalcy again? 
  • I was going to live launch last week, with a second round starting this week. It’s highly possible that I have contracted COVID-19, so I’m not physically feeling up to going live on video, but I still want to launch. In this situation, is moving to evergreen okay?
  • I have a photography business and can not currently operate my business. I have postponed all sessions for the coming weeks and was nowhere near my goal of filling my easter sessions before COVID 19. What should I do now? 
  • These days, it feels weird seeing an email or social media post that’s NOT mentioning the pandemic. How have you adapted your marketing and communication?
  • What are the best small business resources to lean on during this crisis?
  • Since I had to stop my one-on-one work, I’ve been doing free daily videos on Facebook to keep my audience engaged. It’s the first time I’ve offered online services, and I’ve been getting great feedback. How do I transition from offering free content to charging for my online services?
  • How in the world am I supposed to be able to focus on my business with my kids home, trying to support them in their school work, not to mention being the lunch lady, and having my husband home too? HELP!
  • I’m not sure how to help my target audience during this time. I teach interior design to brick and mortar shop owners, and many of my clients’ businesses are shut down right now. How do I adjust my message and my content to serve them when many of them are closed and worry about paying rent?

If you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe in Apple Podcast

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people (just like you) move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 13, 2020
#310: Take Your Brick & Mortar Business Online with Stacy Tuschl (COVID-19 Series)
45:48

Are you a brick and mortar business owner finding yourself having to make quick decisions and shift your business online? Or, maybe you’re an online business already but wondering how you could create an online presence.

One thing is clear: you need to make a pivot.

I want you to know that I’m here to support you every step of the way. In doing so, I’ve brought on someone who is an expert at growing small businesses. Meet Stacy Tuschl -- not only is she a small business pro, she knows how to grow both brick and mortar and online businesses successfully.

Stacy has built a multi-million dollar company called, The Academy of Performing Arts, which offers dance and music classes. She also has an online business and program called, The Foot Traffic Formula, which helps small businesses around the world get more customers in the door, more profit in their pocket, and more happiness in their homes.

Stacy has so much valuable insight around navigating your business in turbulent times, and even more so, she has a unique angle from being a brick and mortar business owner, as well.

In this episode, we talk about:

  • What’s going on in the world of entrepreneurship.
  • How to focus on and prioritize what decisions need to be made in realtime.
  • A step-by-step approach for transitioning your business online quickly.
  • How to get creative and pivot your offers to serve your clients.
  • The future of brick and mortar businesses, the silver lining in this crisis, and a mindset shift towards abundance.

You’re going to find this episode eye-opening and inspiring.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 09, 2020
BONUS: Should I Sell Right Now? (COVID-19 Series)
39:31

I’ve been hearing a lot of questions from online entrepreneurs lately due to our current crisis. Questions like...

  • Should I sell?
  • Should I deeply discount my products and offers?
  • Or, should I give my stuff away for free?

And I get it! We’re in a time of uncertainty… especially for entrepreneurs.

However, I full-heartedly believe it when I say, “yes,” you should absolutely be selling. And “no,” you should not discount or give your products away for free.

The world and the economy need you and your business more than ever. That’s why in this episode, I’m not only going to tell you why you should be selling right now but also 5 powerful ways to find the courage to do so.

I’ll even go as far as to say that you have a civic duty to sell and to show up online during this pandemic, as long as you show up with something of value that can serve others (which my guess is that you do!).

Here’s a peek at the 5 ways you can find the courage to sell right now:

  • Create something of value for free! Yes, I know I just said don’t give you stuff away for free, but there are some ways you can offer value for free and still sell with integrity.
  • Embrace the pivot, and holy heck has there been a lot of pivoting lately.
  • Be willing to make mistakes -- both professionally and personally.
  • Hold your launch revenue goals loosely, but your 2020 overall revenue goals tightly.

  • Fiercely commit to coming out of this crisis stronger.

There are two things I want to leave you with…

  1. I’ve rallied up a ton of free resources to support you as an online and small business owner during this time, be sure to utilize them. (Links at the bottom of this page!)
  2. I want you to answer this question: What would you do in your online business if you were brave? The answer, my friend, is moving forward… and that’s my wish for you.

Click here to listen!

I know you’re going to find so much value and inspiration in this episode.

Also, if you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe in Apple Podcast

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people (just like you) move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 08, 2020
#309a: 5 Ways To Pivot Your Online Business In A Crisis (Covid-19 Series)
33:24

I’m not going to beat around the bush, we are living in a crazy time, and things are moving fast.

As an entrepreneur, especially an online entrepreneur, you need to be moving quickly as well.

I’ve been in awe of my students as I watch them step up, shift, and serve their audience in valuable ways during this time of crisis. In this episode, I share five ways that my students have pivoted their business in light of the economy and uncertainty.

I feel that now, more than ever, showing up with something of high-value that will serve your audience is the very best thing that you can do.

In this episode, I’ll use these stories to debunk three beliefs that have been floating around…

  • Nobody is buying anything right now.
  • It’s inconsiderate to launch or sell something right now -- people will think I’m capitalizing on the crisis.
  • If you don’t have an online business or if you haven’t quite launched your business yet -- now is not the time.

These couldn’t be farther from the truth, and you’ll see that in the stories I share.

  • In this episode, you’ll hear about Hilary Krueger, who created an online offer, launched it in less than 48 hours, and had 200 people sign up in under five days.
  • You’ll learn how Jamie Sears generated around $3,000 in just a couple of days with her on-the-fly training.
  • After that, I’ll share a story with you about how Catherine Ryan Gregory adjusted her launch to accommodate the shifts in our economy.
  • You’ll learn how Carrie Lupoli created a website and a free training in just four hours, which has already served thousands of people and counting.
  • Lastly, I’ll share what Jamie Trull did to support her ideal customer avatar during this time of crisis and the fantastic response she received.
  • I’ll even talk about how to show up and pivot your message if you’re just starting out as an entrepreneur.

If you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show ! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 03, 2020
#309: Becoming A Vision-Driven Leader with Michael Hyatt
46:20

Are you leading with a vision? Or are you wandering around with a half-baked idea of what you want your life and business to look like?

Whether you’re the former or the latter, today’s episode is going to give you even more clarity around your vision.

My guest, mentor, and friend, Michael Hyatt, is not only a best-selling author but also one of the most successful entrepreneurs I know.

His business was featured in Inc. 5000 as one of the fastest-growing private companies after experiencing 300 percent growth in just three years! Mind-blowing, right?

Michael has just released yet another phenomenal book called, “The Vision-Driven Leader,” and that’s what we’re talking about today.

In this episode, Michael offers practices and guidance for identifying your vision, why your vision is the essential ingredient for leadership and impact, how your vision varies from your mission statement, and so much more.

Here’s a look at what we talk about...

  • [05:27] Want to know the difference between businesses that survive and businesses that fail? Those that survive have a crystal clear vision.
  • [07:43] You might be wondering what exactly a vision is. Well, a vision is going to be a clear, inspiring, practical, attractive picture of your organization’s future, three to five years in the future.
  • [12:42] If you’re feeling like you’re struggling with clarity, the good news is that clarity grows over time. A great way to gain more business clarity is to write down what your vision is and where you want to go. Just start with something, and it will get more clear over time.
  • [15:28] Here are some wonderful journal prompts: What is your vision for the future of your team, and what kind of product you want to create? What kind of marketing are you going to have? What’s the future of your impact?
  • [17:07] When you read through what you write down for the future, do you get excited? It has to be inspirational. Michael has four different ideas for inspiration that might help identify where you are.
  • [20:39] A vision is a necessary but not sufficient condition of success — you also need to execute. Having an inspiring vision will help you create and adapt your strategy and say “yes” to the right things.
  • [25:15] Once you start to understand your vision, you want to create a link between your vision and your day to day tasks. Start with your vision script (which you can learn more about in the episode), which should inform your annual goals, quarterly goals, weekly objectives, and daily tasks.
  • [30:18] Don’t think you’ll set your vision once and call it good. Oh no! You’ll want to reconsider and tweak your vision at least once a year.
  • [38:54] Lastly, when it comes to your vision for your business, you will encounter resistance — it’s just part of being an entrepreneur. You must have tenacity, integrity, and courage to stay the course.

By the end of this episode, you’re going to be fired up about clarifying your vision -- a vision that inspires and grows your business.

You’re going to understand how to overcome obstacles when you encounter them. And, most importantly, you’re going to feel empowered and ready to share your vision with the world.

 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <– If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people — just like you — move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Apr 02, 2020
#308c: The Stimulus Package: How to Take Advantage of $350B Earmarked for Small Businesses (COVID-19 Series) with Casey Graham
44:23

Small businesses around the world are facing uncertainty, unemployment, and decisions they never thought possible. On top of that, they are having to learn and learn quickly about government relief solutions.

From one small business owner to another, I understand what it’s like to feel lost in the confusion.

Today’s show will break down, in layman's terms, the Stimulus Package for small businesses and how you can take advantage of it.

My guest, Casey Graham, CEO of Gravy, is going to help me do that. You’ve probably heard me talk about Gravy before -- they do our customer retention and failed payment recovery, which is so important, especially during times like these.

Casey has been in the online business world through two crises now and has a unique perspective and understanding of how to survive a crisis as a small business owner.

Here’s a little sneak peek of what we talked about in this episode:

  • Why online business and online learning is emerging as a giant leader right now, and why understanding the Stimulus Package is extremely important.
  • What The CARES Act is and what it means for small and online businesses.
  • Why the government is leaning on small business owners to help save America during this time.
  • Understanding if this bill is right for you, if you’re eligible, and how you can take advantage of it.
  • Everything you need to know about this bill top to bottom -- from loan amount to loan forgiveness to accessing this bill and everything in between.

Casey even has a value-packed website full of resources to support you and all small and online businesses right now. Head here to check it out!

I know you’re going to find this episode insightful and extremely helpful.

Click here to listen!

A note: this episode is about the United States $2 trillion Stimulus bill passed in response to the coronavirus pandemic. This stimulus package is specific to our U.S. audience.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 31, 2020
#308B: Grow Your Email List With Quizzes with Ryan Levesque
58:11

Rate & Review Online Marketing Made Easy:

If you're on Apple Podcasts, help me help more people by rating and reviewing my show. Reviews let others - just like you - find the actionable, step-by-step strategies to start the "online" journey...of making a business and life they love. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review.” My team and I - we read them all. Thank you!

Raise your hand if you love a good online quiz.

I sure do!

From finding out what celebrity you’re most like, to which jean fit is the most flattering for your body type, to identifying if you’re right for an online course or not, quizzes help you, as the consumer, make easier decisions without the overwhelm.

But… what do quizzes do for you as an entrepreneur? A whole lot!

Quizzes are a great way to grow and segment your email list, better understand your audience, and boost your sales by offering direct guidance for your customers.

My guest, Ryan Levesque, is a pro when it comes to using quizzes, and we got to sit down and chat all about how you can use them, no matter where you are in your business.

Ryan is the Inc. 500 CEO of The ASK Method® Company, an entrepreneur, and the #1 national best-selling author of the books Choose and Ask... which was named by Inc. as the #1 Marketing Book of the Year.

His work has been featured in the Wall Street Journal, USA Today, Forbes, Entrepreneur, on NBC News, and Fox and over 250,000 entrepreneurs subscribe to his email newsletter offering business advice.

He is also a co-founder and investor in bucket.io®, a leading quiz funnel software for entrepreneurs used by over 20M people each year.

Now, you might be thinking that quizzes are a little too advanced for you, but before you disregard this episode, I want to challenge you to stick with me. Why?

Because Ryan and I break down how quizzes can benefit you, even if you’re just starting out.

In fact, we talk about how quizzes can be especially beneficial to grow your email list and better understand your audience in the early stages of your business.

No matter where you are as an entrepreneur, you’re going to walk away from today’s episode with a clear understanding of what it looks like to create a quiz and how quizzes can help you to grow your business.

Mar 30, 2020
#308a: Everything You Need to Know About Working From Home (But Were Too Afraid To Ask!) with Rachel Hollis (COVID-19 Series)
53:39

Like many these days, you might be finding yourself working virtually -- and whether this is new to you or not, there are some simple strategies you can implement to stay focused, on track, and moving forward as an entrepreneur.

My dear friend, Rachel Hollis, originally interviewed me for her podcast RISE, and because we both want this episode to reach as many entrepreneurs and individuals affected by the recent crisis as possible, we are releasing it on the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast as well.

I hope with all my heart that you find this episode helpful, insightful, and inspiring.

Now, why did Rachel come to me looking for guidance on how to run a virtual team and work from home without losing focus?

Probably because I’ve been building a virtual team for almost 11 years, which means I’ve got a couple tricks up my sleeve for being successful in the online workspace.

Here’s a preview of what we talked about...

  • How to set expectations and what tools are best for staying on track.
  • The importance of sticking to a task and how to make sure your team does the same.
  • How to show up for your team and lead in turbulent times.
  • How to minimize context switching -- trust me when I say that this one is a lifesaver!
  • Tips for staying focused.
  • Strategies for maintaining healthy work habits and setting up your workspace.
  • The importance of over-communication to your team and collaborators.

This episode is courtesy of our guest, Rachel Hollis, and the RISE podcast (where it first appeared). To receive more tangible and tactical tools from New York Times Best-Selling author, Rachel Hollis, check out RISE.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 28, 2020
#308: Courage: Your Gateway Drug To Confidence with Jennifer Allwood
43:25

Rate & Review Online Marketing Made Easy:

If you're on Apple Podcasts, help me help more people by rating and reviewing my show. Reviews let others - just like you - find the actionable, step-by-step strategies to start the "online" journey...of making a business and life they love. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review.” My team and I - we read them all. Thank you!

What if I told you that confidence shouldn’t be your goal?

Crazy, right? I thought confidence was always the goal!

According to my guest today, Jennifer Allwood, there’s something else you should be focusing on… courage!

I’m so excited to have Jennifer back on the show to talk about her new book, which will be released April 7th, 2020, “Fear Is Not The Boss Of You,” which is a must-read as an entrepreneur.

We also chat about why courage should be your goal over confidence.

How to shift your mindset around imposter syndrome, because that’s essential as an entrepreneur.

We even go talk about the real way to discover your confidence (hint: it has to do with taking action -- imagine that!).

Jennifer has helped thousands of creative entrepreneurs grow their business by leveraging social media and the online space, and she’s someone I love learning from.

She teaches people how to find freedom in their business by utilizing multiple revenue streams, as she shared in episode 215.

You’re going to love Jennifer’s approach and strategies for becoming more courageous in your life and business.

Mar 26, 2020
#307B: The Lies Holding You Back
56:43
  • You’re talented.
  • You deserve the best.
  • You can build a wildly successful business.
  • You’re organized, intelligent, and capable of creating the life of your dreams -- the life you deserve.

How do you feel when I say those things? Do you feel inspired and fired up?

Or, are you shaking your head thinking, “Amy, you’re so full of it!”

My dear friend, I certainly hope you’re shaking your head, “YES!” and you feel inspired. However, I know what it can be like to believe deflating lies… especially as an entrepreneur.

My guest today, Dave Hollis, knows what it’s like to believe those lies, as well.

Dave is the COO of the media company and inspirational powerhouse, Hollis Company, which he runs with his wife and my close friend, Rachel Hollis.

He’s also just released his first book, “Get Out Of Your Own Way,” which is simply phenomenal.

Today, Dave and I talk about the thoughts that tend to hold you back from your true potential and how to overcome old thought patterns that aren’t in your best interest.

We also talk about the “shoulds” that are hindering your growth, your solution for getting unstuck, and so much more.

Here’s a preview of our interview...

  • [02:58] My good friend, Dave Hollis -- the COO of Hollis Company and husband to Rachel Hollis -- has just released his new book, Get Out of Your Own Way: A Skeptic’s Guide to Growth and Fulfillment. Help celebrate him with me!
  • [06:52] If you're struggling, you must find a community to connect with about what’s going on. That’s exactly what this book did for Dave. It allowed him to be fully transparent -- about the good and the bad.
  • [10:17] Dave was inspired by his wife's growth, and while he was a skeptic at first, he eventually decided that personal development was for him. In his book, he talks about how he got out of his own way so that others can use his strategies to do the same. And let me tell you, he knocked it out of the ballpark!
  • [18:04] If you are on a path of personal development and doing big things, and your significant other isn't on board with it, don't push them. Instead, let them see the light of your journey and the results that it produces. Let their curiosity allow them to transform their lives.
  • [20:07] Dave talks about the identity frame that we pick up from those around us as we are growing up. For example, "women entrepreneurs can’t have ambitions and be a good mom" is a common one. This couldn’t be further from the truth. You must make the decision about whose opinion you will believe and carry with you.
  • [26:27] For 14 years, Dave was the primary breadwinner but when Rachel’s book sold 3 million copies and the financial contribution started to shift in their relationship, Dave was worried. He opens up about an unconscious fear around if Rachel would still want him if he was no longer the main source of financial support.
  • [35:57] Here’s the good news, it's never too late to make a pivot, transform yourself, or change direction. You must focus on what’s best for you and not what others are thinking of you -- because the truth is that they just aren't! #sorrytobreakittoyou
  • [41:13] Being stuck is being in a place where you aren't growing or don't have the opportunity to fail. Here’s what Dave proposes: expose yourself to opportunities to fail and push outside of your comfort zone on a regular basis.
  • [45:56] Have unbelievable clarity about who you want to be. Once you know what you stand for, then you know the role you have to play in your life. Connect to a why that is bigger than the unpredictability of life. What do you believe in? Who are you? What's your leverage?
Mar 24, 2020
#307A: 5 Ways to Navigate Your Business Through Crisis (COVID-19 Series)
59:47

With COVID-19, things are changing by the second. That's why I want to support you -- my community -- and show you what it looks like to move forward even when you’re feeling uncertain.

This episode is real and raw...it's messy, clunky at times, and I share what I’ve experienced so that you may learn some of the things about navigating a business with the world changing so rapidly.

So, I've put together five things that you can do to navigate your business through the Coronavirus crisis. You’ll find two mindset tools and three strategies to implement right away.

And listen, I know you’re probably feeling some confusion right now. Whether you have an online business, a digital course, plans to launch, or you’re just starting out...Don't. Worry. I’m going to give you the guidance you need to keep moving forward.

Here’s the deal, you can’t ignore what’s going on in the world. In fact, I firmly believe that you have to talk about this no matter where you are on your entrepreneurial journey.

To further help you, I’ve put together a freebie called “How To Be Productive Working From Home During Uncertainty.” Be sure you grab that, too.

Here’s a snapshot of the five ways to navigate your business through a crisis that I talk about in this episode:

  • #1: Get into action. Feel the feelings but also get into action to keep your mindset abundant and focused. You’re an entrepreneur, which means you’re resilient.
  • #2: Commit to a morning routine and end of the day shut down. It’s easy to get distracted with the news, your family at home, and just plain old emotions, but creating rituals will keep you focused on the needle movers in your business. (More guidance on this in the freebie!)
  • #3: Clarify your crisis messaging. Get clear on what you’re going to say to your audience during this time and how you’re going to position yourself and your business -- even if you have a small audience.
  • #4: Show up and offer something valuable and free that will resonate, support, and inspire. Tune in to hear how we did this.
  • #5: You’re probably wondering, “Amy, I don’t feel I should be selling right now!” My answer to you is… if you stop selling, our economy will be crushed. You are not opportunistic if you’re selling in our current climate -- as long as you offer a solution to help serve your audience. Take the time to reevaluate your offers to make sure they align with what people need in this time of uncertainty and be willing to pivot if needed.

People have more needs today than they did a week ago. Remember that you are a master problem solver. Now is the time to experiment. Try new things and never give up.

Your audience is not wanting or looking for perfection. Your audience is looking for support, direction, and leadership.

Show up for them. Show up for your community, your audience, and your paying customers.

I hope you find this episode is just what you need to hear as we are navigating through this time of chaos, uncertainty, and change. I hope you find the light and gratitude in any way possible. And above all, I hope you and your family are safe and healthy.

For further support, be sure to grab my freebie “How To Be Productive Working From Home During Uncertainty.”

 

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

Mar 21, 2020
#307: 4 Best Entrepreneurial Tools For Starting A Business (Part 2)
35:34

Welcome back to Part 2 of this episode, where you’re going to learn about my favorite tools for communication, customer service, and a couple of bonus tools that I adore.

If you missed Part 1, where I went over my top tools for email marketing, list building, social media, and project management, be sure to head back and check out that episode right after this one.

The tools I mention in today’s episode have helped me not only scale my business but also give me back the time and energy to build the business of my dreams… a business that was considered a small business not that long ago.

Since I mentioned a lot of tools between Part 1 and Part 2 of this episode, I’m going to recommend that you focus on the parts of your business that you’re looking to invest in right now.

Only focus on one or two tools and add on little by little as you grow.

To make this really easy for you, I’ve put together a free PDF with all the tools that I’ve mentioned in Part 1 and Part 2 of this episode. Be sure to snag that freebie right here!

Here’s a preview of today’s episode...

  • [04:01] Do you have a team or work with contractors? If so, you have to check out Slack! It’s my favorite real-time communication tool -- way better than email.
  • [09:52] When it comes to customer support, Help Scout has transformed our approach and organization! It has simplified taking care of our customers and making sure they have what they need.
  • [12:42] Kajabi is the Mac Daddy of all tools. Seriously! Say goodbye to having to be tech-savvy because Kajabi has everything in one place. From your digital course platform to your sales page, opt-in page, and email service provider… Kajabi has you covered!
  • [19:39] I kind of wish I would have thought of this bonus tool! Searchie allows you to search for content inside of videos or audio. I know, so good, right? You can search for keywords in any video or audio content you have. It’s just that simple! Searchie is definitely for those more advanced entrepreneurs.
  • [24:02] And although it isn’t an online tool, my absolute favorite tool is the Full Focus Planner. This is a physical planner, which I talk about all the time, helps to keep me organized, motivated, and clear on the most important daily and quarterly goals I have for myself and my business.

Get excited for next week's episode where I'm talking about a few more tools I couldn't live without. See you there!

Mar 19, 2020
#306: 4 Best Entrepreneurial Tools For Starting A Business (Part 1)
28:39

“Technology is nothing. What's important is that you have a faith in people, that they're basically good and smart, and if you give them tools, they'll do wonderful things with them.”

I love this quote from Steve Jobs. Why? Because I know that tools allow me to scale my business and create growth and impact.

But here’s the thing… not all tools are made the same.

When I was starting out, I had no idea which tools would be worth my financial and time investment and which ones would not. Let’s just say, I’ve learned a lot about what tools will be valuable in creating a successful business throughout the years.

And now, I’m offering you my insight into what tools you should consider using to help your business grow, scale, and succeed!

I decided to break this episode into two parts because there was so much value in it.

So, in this episode -- Part 1 -- you’ll learn about my favorite tools for…

  • email marketing and list building
  • social media
  • project management

In Part 2 of this episode, you’ll learn about the tools we use in my business for communication and customer service. Along with some bonus tools that I love and can’t help but share.

Here’s a sneak peek of how today’s episode goes...

  • [07:11] ConvertKit is my go-to when it comes to a basic, simple email service provider -- especially for new entrepreneurs. What I love about it is that it allows you to collect emails and names in a legitimate way, and they have top-notch customer service!
  • [09:14] You’ve heard me talk about freebies and lead magnets a million times before, LeadPages allows you to create simple opt-in pages so you can start getting email addresses and traction from those assets. Plus, it integrates with ConvertKit and gives you beautifully designed opt-in pages, so you can email your list on a regular basis. Can you say win-win?
  • [14:28] Want to know my favorite tool for social media? Look no further! Social Curator is my answer. They provide you with stunning images and caption prompts so you can focus less on social media and more on the important things in your business.
  • [19:19] When it comes to project management and organization, Asana is the absolute best! In fact, I wish I would have used a project management tool like Asana from the very beginning. Whether it’s just you, you and a contractor or two, or an entire team, setting your business up in Asana will keep you organized and moving forward!

Get excited for next week's episode where I'm talking about a few more tools I couldn't live without. See you there!

Mar 12, 2020
#305b: One of the Best Ways To Boost Sales
44:05

You guys know I’m a big fan of creating urgency for your courses using deadlines. In fact, I’m kind of a stickler about.

Well, guess what? I’ve found someone equally as excited about creating urgency and setting deadlines. So, naturally, I had to invite him onto the podcast.

His name is Jack Born and he’s a pro when it comes to this topic. He’s going to tell you why you should be using deadlines for your customers… and how you can go about it the right way.

Jack is the founder of Deadline Funnel, not to mention several other software platforms, which help entrepreneurs, just like you, boost sales and automate their businesses.

There are a lot of misconceptions around deadlines within a business…

Will they help you sell more?
Will they hinder your audience from buying?

These are things you have to know as an entrepreneur with an online product, especially if you do a live launch like I do with my Digital Course Academy program.

Listen to this episode with an open mind because you’re going to be blown away by some of the tidbits and strategies Jack gives you that you can use within your business to boost those sales.

And honestly, if you’re just starting out or trying to gain some insight into how to launch your business, this episode is going to help you build the confidence around creating that urgency without feeling pushy.

Here’s a look at what we talked about...

  • [06:08] My guest today, Jack has been a student of the power of persuasion and knows urgency is a strong motivator.
  • [13:07] It’s essential that what you say in your marketing is genuine and true to promote credibility.
  • [16:51] Deadlines boost sales. Period! They also help those people who are on the fence make a decision and take action because, let's be honest, we all need a little push when it comes to big decisions.
  • [19:52] Find out Jack’s tools for creating a next-level offer that isn’t pushy.
  • [32:22] Want to know the hard truth? By not using deadlines, you are leaving money on the table and helping less potential customers. Crazy when you look at it that way, right?
  • [37:14] Oh, and my favorite part of this interview was at the very end when Jack gives tangible action items for setting up an automated launch with urgency the right way.
Mar 09, 2020
#305: Why Overnight Success Is A Myth
44:51

Riddle me this…

What do Steven Spielberg, JK Rowling, Lady Gaga, Marie Forleo, Oprah, and Rachel Hollis all have in common?

If you guessed “success that took time, grit, and persistence,” then you’d be spot on! (I’m sure that’s what you said ;)

So why do we, as entrepreneurs, look at Instagram and think that we’re the only ones who haven’t figured out the secret to overnight success yet?

The truth is that we don’t know the whole story. In fact, it’s rare that we know the truth until some time later. You know… the not-so-sexy story of massive amounts of hustle, hard work, and years of grinding the pavement. Yes, I said years.

And because of this, it’s easy to get stuck in the mindset that we want what we see others experiencing with their business or their success -- that explosion with “minimal” hard work and grit.

The reality is that there are very few successful entrepreneurs who have experienced overnight success.

Behind every successful story… there is commitment, determination, and resilience.

So, I’m just going to be bold and say that I think overnight success is a myth.

And… if I may take it one step further… I’d even go as far as to say that there is so much benefit to not experiencing overnight success.

In this episode, we talk about some of my favorite examples of people who might look like overnight successes from the outside, but in all actuality are not.

Plus, I’ll share the benefits of slow, consistent growth, because I’ve experienced first hand how beneficial this can be.

And, in true Online Marketing Made Easy fashion, I’ve got a little three-step process for eliminating that unconscious desire for overnight success.

Oh, and I’d be lying if I said I didn’t get a little worked up and passionate about this topic. You’ll know what I mean when you listen!

Here’s a glimpse of what you’ll hear…

  • [08:16] Ever heard of a Dyson vacuum? Yeah, the owner, James Dyson had 5,127 failed vacuum prototypes over a 15-year span before he became a success. Many times, we don’t know the whole story of failure, struggle, and success.
  • [12:09] Here’s a fun fact, Steven Spielberg was rejected from the University of Southern California three times before he attended another school that he dropped out of to direct some of our favorite movies?
  • [12:45] Can you guess how many times JK Rowling’s book, Harry Potter was rejected before being picked up? Twelve times — and she didn’t give up!
  • [13:55] Did you know that Lady Gaga started honing her voice at the age of 4? Tune in to hear her inspirational story!
  • [14:50] Queen O, Oprah, was fired from a job as a TV reporter because she was told she wasn't fit for television. Crazy, right? She didn’t let that stop her. Instead, she picked herself up and kept moving forward.
  • [17:43] My mentor and friend, Marie Forleo held multiple jobs and was a bartender while building her business. Just like Marie, those early parts of building your business are important for building character.
  • [20:33] Being in it for the long haul helps you identify who you are and what you stand for. Find out what millionaire entrepreneur, Laura Belgray has to say about taking years to hit the success she experiences today.
  • [23:54] Growing your business steadily and slowly allows you to be more intentional, and intentionality gives you the time and space to clarify your business along the way.
  • [26:05] Let’s take a play from Jaime Kern Lima from IT Cosmetics playbook and make it a priority to keep our faith bigger than our fear. Are you onboard?
  • [30:16] Tune in to find out my 3-step process for eliminating that unconscious desire for overnight success.
  • [34:10] Once you've reached the success that you're after, I challenge you to reassess and then create a new definition of success. I guarantee that your definition of success will evolve over time.

Do you ever have those days where you just need an extra boost of courage? Maybe a hug, maybe a little self-love, grace, and patience?

Be sure to grab the freebie I created to remind you that you're on the right path and if you keep at it and you commit to your dream, you too can have the same success. It's a fill-in-the-blank letter to yourself to read on those days when you need it most. You can get it right here.

Mar 05, 2020
#304: Marie Forleo's Best Business Tips For Success
37:25

Let me take you back in time when I was just starting out.

This was before YouTube and definitely before podcasts were a thing. It was a time where if you wanted to become an entrepreneur… you pretty much had to figure it out on your own.

(Thank goodness we’re out of those dark ages!)

I remember wishing I could have a mentor or some insight into starting a business. You know, what works and what doesn’t.

I eventually connected with a woman who would become my mentor. A woman who we all know and love today as Marie Forleo.

Marie was named by Oprah as a thought leader for the next generation. She’s the star of the award-winning show MarieTV, with over 52 million views, and host of The Marie Forleo Podcast, with more than eleven million downloads.

She gave me so many tips and tools for starting, building, and growing my business. I’m forever grateful!

If you’ve been an Online Marketing Made Easy podcast fan for some time now, you know that Marie has been a guest on my show many times.

Every time I interview her, she brings so much insight and value. I thought it was high time I pulled some of her best tips and tools for starting a business and rolled them into one episode.

Here’s why…

I want you to have all the knowledge, support, and tools you need to take your dream of creating a business and make it a reality.

I know how intimidating it can be… trust me! I’ve been there. And so my goal is to give you what you need to make starting a business simple and seamless.

So, here are some of my favorite tips from my mentor, and multi-million dollar entrepreneur, Marie Forleo

She’s taught entrepreneurs, artists, and multi-passionate go-getters from all walks of life how to dream big and back it up with daily action to create results, and now, she’s sharing her secrets with you!

Check out what we talked about...

  • [02:44] Today, you get to learn from my mentor — Marie Forleo! I believe that having a mentor, at every stage of your business, is essential. Get ready to learn some of her top business and entrepreneurial tips!
  • [09:04] Marie talks about two fears that tend to keep people from designing a life that aligns with their dreams. Find out what those two fears are. Oh, and by the way, these fears are 100% figureoutable!
  • [14:18] As an entrepreneur, you must give yourself permission to play, experiment and test. Find out why!
  • [19:59] Find out some of Marie’s favorite strategies for writing stellar content. Trust me, you’re going to want to hear these!
  • [27:38] Marie shares her number one reason for working so hard when she was first starting out. Here’s a hint… it should be your reason too. She talks about the importance of investing in yourself and your education.
  • [29:37] Leave it to Marie to call BS on “big breakthroughs.” She says, “There is no single opportunity that anyone else can give you that is more important for your success than the small daily actions that you have to take every day in the service of your own creativity.”
  • [32:36] Get ready for some tough-love… “If you're not growing you're dying.” If you’re serious about succeeding as an entrepreneur, you must commit to making ongoing education a habit.

Today is your last chance to change your future and the success of your business in 2020 with B-School! This is the program that not only changed my business but changed my life! If you're serious about creating a business and life you love, B-School is your answer. Today is also the last day you can receive all of my B-School freebies!

Plus, I just added a special bonus! When you enroll in B-School using my affiliate link, not only will you get my B-School Bonus Experience, but you will ALSO get access to my B-School CliffsNotes Audio Collection!

This B-School CliffsNotes Audio Collection is truly a personal experience where I take you through each module, week by week and help you identify where to focus your attention and time.

In a nutshell, it's practical advice, delivered via short audio segments, from someone who went through B-School herself (yours truly!), and knows how to help you get the most from it.

You’ll get the inside scoop on what topics you need to pay *special attention* to, and I’ll also raise the red flag on potential landmines and rabbit holes that might throw other students off.

This is always my most talked about bonus, so you are in for a treat! Click here to change your life with B-School!

Feb 27, 2020
#303: The One Episode I Didn't Want to Record
24:44

The title says it all.

This is an episode, I definitely didn’t want to record… at first! But then I got to thinking, and I knew that sharing this experience with you, and being vulnerable was only going to help and benefit you and your business in the long run.

Here’s what happened. I got an email from a student who was disappointed in my newest product and made sure I knew that she was not impressed.

And you know what, it hurt. It really hurt.

But after I took a step back, I realized that there are five things that I need to commit to in order to move my business forward, stand up for what I believe in, and block out those who don’t agree with me.

Here’s a snapshot of those five things…

Those who have achieved more than me will never judge me for wanting more.
Sometimes things are going to get tough -- that’s just the nature of being an entrepreneur. So, I must commit to having thicker skin.
I create my own thoughts and no one can hurt me. I’m in charge of what I think and feel… period.
I’ll never let an individual’s opinion dictate how I feel or how I do business.
I am here to stay.

This episode was tough for me, so I want to thank you for allowing me to share my heart.

Here’s a breakdown of the episode…

  • [02:50] As entrepreneurs, we’ll always have people on the internet who disagree with our life or business goals — we have to ignore them. However, it’s a little different when you hear negative feedback from a student, and that’s exactly what happened to me.
  • [03:37] During my recent membership site launch, a past student wrote in to share her opinion of what I was doing and, let’s just say, it wasn’t very positive.
  • [05:39] Receiving something like this from a student of mine stung. In the moment, I recorded a response to her to let her know why I created my newest product and why I believe in it so deeply.
  • [11:59] It’s important to remember that someone who has achieved more than you will never judge you for wanting more.
  • [14:20] Sometimes things are going to get rocky and feel really uncomfortable. You've got to have thicker skin!
  • [15:19] Because you create your own thoughts and feelings, no one can hurt you. Always keep in mind that you are in charge of what I think and what you feel.
  • [17:25] At the end of the day, no matter who disagrees with what I’m doing, I am here to stay! Tell yourself that during hard times when building your online business.
Feb 20, 2020
#302B: Your VIP Backstage Pass To The Best Entrepreneurial Advice
18:28

What if I gave you a backstage pass to my annual event, The Entrepreneur Experience?

Well, in this episode, that’s exactly what we’re going to do!

In October 2019, Rachel Hollis, Stu McLaren, Jasmine Star, and Gina Gomez joined me in San Diego, along with over 600 entrepreneurs from every walk of life, for this amazing event.

These all-star speakers brought their a-game and shared some pretty amazing entrepreneurial advice. Advice that was so good, I couldn’t just keep it to myself!

In this episode, I’m giving you a little sneak peek of what The Entrepreneur Experience 2019 was all about and the phenomenal business advice that the attendees gained while they were there.

First, you’ll hear from Rachel Hollis. She gets real (imagine that) and gives you some tough love. She talks about competition and an excuse that might be holding you back.

After that, you’ll hear from Stu McLaren. He talks all about building trust to attract your ideal customer and taking a stand for what you believe in.

My girl, Jasmine Star, is up next and she gives some practical social media advice. After all, she is the queen of social media.

She also gives her take on third party posting apps -- I know this is a question every entrepreneur has!

And then I have Gina Gomez coming in with a secret to creating happy customers and interactions.

  • [03:53] Rachel Hollis says, "Don't compare your life to someone's curated social media life. We don't have time to waste. Every second we are looking outside ourselves to find the answer, we are wasting time."
  • [08:04] Stu admits that he struggled with the guilt of making too much money but the truth is that money allows you to stand for what you believe in and make an impact!
    [12:52] Jasmine Star gives her tried and tested experience with third-party posting apps and why you should reconsider using them to organically reach your audience.
    [14:30] Gina says, "Treat everyone you work with as if they are your dream clients. Imagine how implementing this in your business would impact your experience, business, and industry."
Feb 17, 2020
#302: From Lacking Confidence To Multi-Millions with Lisa Bilyeu
01:02:34

One of the biggest excuses I hear from people wanting to start a business is that they feel they have the confidence they need to take their dreams and ideas and make them successful.

My guest in this episode, Lisa Bilyeu, is living proof that it doesn’t matter what skill set or level of experience you have. What does matter is that you’re persistent and committed to creating a life that fulfills you and making your dreams your reality.

Lisa is the co-founder of Quest Nutrition, and without any prior entrepreneurial experience, she helped grow the company by 57 thousand percent -- that’s 82.6 million dollars in revenue -- in just three years.

Lisa and her husband, Tom Bilyeu, have gone on to sell Quest Nutrition, a protein bar company, and have built a successful media company called, Impact Theory and Women of Impact.

What I love about this interview is that Lisa and I dive into it all. We talk about figuring things out as you go (which I think we can all relate to), mindset shifts, challenges, actionable items to grow your business (yes, please!), shifting your perspective as a female entrepreneur, and even relationships.

If you’re feeling like you don’t have enough experience to create a successful business or to become an entrepreneur, this episode is a must-listen!

Here’s a sneak peek of our conversation…

  • [01:43] Could you imagine growing your company by 57,000% in just three years or $82.6 million in revenue? Lisa Bilyeu the co-founder of Quest Nutrition and Impact Theory did just that.
  • [11:26] Lisa gives a fabulous entrepreneurial tip... model your life as successful people model theirs. Find out how her and her husband did this until they started Quest Nutrition.
  • [24:18] Lisa has the best mindset. She reminds herself that even if she starts a project from zero, as long as she could figure it out she would be okay.
  • [28:21] "Saying I don't know is an excuse." She gives the hard truth that there is someone out there doing what you want to do.
  • [36:18] Lisa and her husband shifted into a new business to make an impact on the lives of others.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy, the company I trust to contact my customers within hours of a failed payment, capturing the updated billing information, and saving the customer my team and I worked so hard to acquire. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more a year and you know you’re losing money due to failed payments each month, I encourage you to check out Gravy. Click here to see how they can be an extension of your customer service and save you money.

Feb 13, 2020
#301: Start Before You're Ready With Marie Forleo
53:50

Did you know that the number one regret people have during their last days is that they didn’t have the courage to follow their dreams and live a life that aligned with their deepest desires?

In her book, The Top Five Regrets Of The Dying, Bronnie Ware says…

“This was the most common regret of all. When people realize that their life is almost over and look back clearly on it, it is easy to see how many dreams have gone unfulfilled. Most people had not honored even a half of their dreams and had to die knowing that it was due to choices they had made, or not made.”

Did you just get chills? I did.

So my question for you is this… how are you going to make sure that you don’t experience the same regret?

How are you going to conjure up the courage to follow your dreams and live a life that you love?

A life on purpose.
A life that fulfills you.

My guest and dear friend, Marie Forleo has a simple practice to help you minimize regret and step into the confidence of taking action towards your dreams -- towards your heart’s truest desires.

Marie’s been a guest on the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast many times before. And if you don’t know who she is, she’s been named the thought-leader of the next generation by Oprah herself. She’s a New York Times bestselling author, creator of one of the most popular training programs on the planet, B-School, and the creative force behind her award-winning show, MarieTV.

In this episode, we’re talking about a powerful practice that she calls the “Ten-Year Test,” why you should always start before you’re ready, and how to create momentum towards your dreams.

We’ll also talk about Marie’s free online business building workshop that she just released in which she’ll teach you The 6 Pillars of Building an Online Business. Marie has a tremendous gift for breaking things down to simple and understandable steps, so you do not want to miss this!

I look forward to it all year. You’re going to love it!

DON’T MISS THIS… The first video in Marie’s workshop series goes live today. Marie will share a simple 6 step roadmap to help you launch and grow your business online.  You can find it at AmyPorterfield.com/Marie or click on the image below. Don’t wait, because the series will only be available for a limited time.

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn, one of my favorite platforms to market on to reach my ideal customers. LinkedIn is excellent for businesses of all sizes and especially helpful for small businesses who are just getting started and are looking to drive traffic and engagement. At the end of the day, LinkedIn ads are helping smaller businesses get bigger results… and that’s why I love it. Right now, LinkedIn is offering my listeners a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit to launch your very first campaign. Click here to grab your ad credit!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Feb 06, 2020
#300: Our Top 8 Business and Online Marketing Strategies to Celebrate Our 300th Episode
39:20

Cue the confetti! We are celebrating our 300th episode, and I can hardly believe it. What a wild, fun, and amazing ride! Thank you for being part of this journey with me. 

It’s because of you that we are here at episode 300. 

We wanted to do something extra special for this episode -- something a little different. So, we picked some of our favorite segments from our top episodes and wrapped them up all into one like a little gift. (A gift from me to you!)

Speaking of gifts… we have a giveaway 

That means that this episode is plump full of some of our very best business and online marketing tidbits handpicked from our impressive (if I may say so myself) 300 episode line-up. 

Some of these clips are interviews, some are from solo episodes from yours truly, and all of them are extremely insightful. I cannot wait for you to hear them!

From Marie Forleo to Jennifer Allwood to guidance from my personal experience, you’re in for a treat (and going to want to take notes!) Here’s a glimpse of what’s in this power-packed episode…

Tip #1: Showing Your Scars. I talk about how being vulnerable and real can help you get noticed whether you’re starting out or a veteran in your industry.

Tip #2: Use a Facebook group to build relationships. Caitlin Bacher shares her knowledge and experience warming up cold leads with a value-packed Facebook group.

Tip #3: Utilize a live series instead of a webinar. What?! I know, right? Not what you’d expect from me. Listen to find out when and why a live series might be a perfect fit for you and your business.

Tip #4: Get crystal clear on your Ideal Customer Avatar. I’m at it with my girl, Gina Onativia. She breaks down the importance of having a clear understanding of your ICA and gives you specific examples of how your ICA will help you with two very important areas when creating your digital course.

Tip #5: Get creative with your free, valuable content. Have you been stuck on what to create for your freebie? Look no further! This clip gives you some of my favorite examples of what to do for your freebie or lead magnet, and a few questions to ask yourself to get hyper clear on what you’re going to create. 

Tip #6: Utilize various streams of income. I loved this episode! Jennifer Allwood drops a few knowledge bombs about when and how to create multiple streams of income to boost your revenue and create passive income. 

Tip #7: Attract leads with a free video or audio training. In this solo clip, I dive into why having a video or audio training for your lead magnet is one of the best ways to connect with your audience on a personal level. 

Tip #8: Build your email list like your life depends on it! I’m back at it with Queen Marie Forleo. We get into why you should tread cautiously when building your business via social media and what you should do instead to ensure you keep your audience close to you and to strengthen your communication skills. 

Okay, I know that was a lot. Here’s how today’s episode goes... 

  • [03:18] Be more human with what you share with your audience, and don't be afraid to tell stories related to the messy middle over and over again. It's scary but, trust me, it's so worth it. Talk about the tough stuff when you're in it, but also tell stories of how you overcame the hard stuff so that your audience can learn from your mistakes.
  • [07:17] A Facebook group is your ticket to showing up in your ICA's news feed! If you've got a page, you better have a group too. Use it to build your email list and your relationship with your audience.
  • [10:04] Not quite ready to host a webinar? Try doing a Facebook live series instead. This is a great way to promote a launch and offer your audience valuable content!
  • [13:10] Take your ICA a step further by identifying how they will feel before and after your course or offer. Remember that people are driven by emotion -- lead with that!
  • [19:04] Attract your ICA with valuable, free content... but make sure it's directed towards them. Struggle to come up with a freebie? Listen up for some prompts!
  • [23:37] Set your business up for revenue success with multiple streams of revenue! There are many ways to do this whether you're a beginner or an advanced entrepreneur.
  • [26:15] Have you ever thought about using free videos or audio for your lead magnet? In fact, these are my favorite lead magnets. Your audience will love these -- trust me!
  • [39:55] Build your email list like your business depends on it... because it actually does. Get this, email marketing has an ROI of 3800%. Plus, 72% prefer promotional content through email over social. So when I say you should use grow your email list... I mean it!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 30, 2020
#299: Say Goodbye to Imposter Syndrome and Skyrocket Your Business Success
41:21

What if I told you that I’m actually not a fan of this topic. Or, at least I thought I wasn’t… until I recorded this episode. (Yes, it’s that good!)

In fact, I might even stretch it to say that this is one of the best episodes I’ve ever done. (You’re going to love it!)

I know that you’re either struggling with imposter syndrome or you have in the past. How do I know this? Because I’ve dealt with it, and I feel it starting to creep in from time to time. Oh, and most of my successful entrepreneurial friends have experienced it too. 

The good news is that I have powerful tools (that I’ve personally used many times) to help you overcome imposter syndrome so this can be your most successful year yet -- personally and professionally. 

Want to know what they are? Well, first of all, let’s talk about what imposter syndrome is. 

Dr. Amy Cuddy, who is a social psychologist, New York Times bestselling author, and a Harvard lecturer who focuses on the psychology of leadership and influence, says that imposter syndrome can be defined as “a collection of feelings of inadequacy that persist despite evident success.”

Now, let’s take a peek at five proven actions for giving imposter syndrome the boot…

  1. Get out of your head and into your heart. Find out how one of my students, Natalie MacLean, let her heart lead her to a $30,000 launch.
  2. Take action! I give you three specific ways to transform the energy of imposter syndrome into action so you can attract new clients and, in turn, boost your revenue.
  3. Stay in your lane! You can do this two ways: stop chasing shiny objects and stop comparing yourself to others. 
  4. Embrace competition and acknowledge that there is enough room for everyone. (Because there is, and amazing things can happen when you do this!)
  5. Acknowledge your credibility and success. Find out how to do this in the episode.

Here’s a breakdown of how this episode unfolds...

  • [07:48] Imposter syndrome is defined as a collection of feelings of inadequacy that persist in spite of evident success. Imposters suffer from chronic self-doubt and a sense of intellectual fraudulence that override any feelings of success or external proof of their competence. The bummer is that almost all entrepreneurs experience these feelings of inadequacy at some point in their careers. (The good news is that this podcast will help you overcome those feelings!)
  • [08:50] Imposter syndrome is sneaky and it shows up differently for everyone. For one person, it might show up as paralysis and an inability to move forward. For another, it might look like blocked creativity or throwing in the towel.
  • [09:32] Stop overthinking your business. When you do, your head gets in the way. Lead with your heart and show up as your true self so you can share your authenticity with the world. Here's a little trick for when imposter syndrome shows up.
  • [17:01] Taking action will guarantee that you move from your head to your heart. That's when you'll be able to share your gifts with your audience.
  • [24:52] I've said it once and I'll say it again... stop chasing shiny objects. Continuing to change your business offer or product and jumping ship never works -- trust me on this one. I promise you that every decision you make gets you closer to where you want to be. So buckle up, stay in your lane, and keep moving forward.
  • [32:02] Say it with me, "Competition is my friend." Here's why competition is essential for your business to thrive. Plus, a little challenge for you!
  • [36:14] It's time you finally acknowledge your credibility and success. Here's what to do to build confidence in your skills and knowledge!

Because this is a topic almost every entrepreneur can relate to, I want you to head to our private Facebook community and share what actions you’re taking to overcome imposter syndrome. 

And, while you’re at it, let me know what you thought of this episode. 

 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 23, 2020
Q & A: Business Tips & Tools With Amy
34:38

Did you hear the news? 

I’ve started taking business questions directly from my audience! People just like you. I’ve taken some of the best questions from my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community and answered them right here on this bonus episode. 

Now, you’re probably wondering how the heck you can be part of this amazing opportunity.

Head over to our private Facebook community to join, drop a question in the discussion and tag #askamy, and we’ll add it to our list of questions. 

I’m going to be recording these Q & A bonus episodes from time to time, and while I hope to get to as many questions as possible, I can’t promise I will get to every one. I’ll certainly do my best!

Head over to our Facebook community to get your questions on the list. 

Let’s dive into the Q & A. I have a feeling you might have some of the same questions!

  1. April MacLean asks about knowing what to say and when to her audience. 
  2. Maggie Gelin is wondering why her students would want to work with her when they can get the same information for free on the world wide web.
  3. Kylie Chapman wants to know how to create a visually cohesive brand on a budget.
  4. Jill Davidian is looking for guidance around a first hire, and if she should consider a VA, a team, or an Online Business Manager.
  5. Carole Stroud wants a behind-the-scenes peek at my podcast and wants to know if I use bullet points or a prompter.
  6. Gee Sus Emanuel Reyes is looking for a bit of advice around the best email platform to invest in (if any) as his email list grows. 

Here are some of the goodies from this episode...

  • [02:19] Believe it or not, when it comes to content, you must shift your mindset! Make sure you're leaving room for experimenting and trying new things. Enjoy the journey, chunk everything down, and take one thing at a time.
  • [08:33] You're going to have different types of Ideal Customer Avatars... and that's okay! Make sure you're creating different messaging for each ICA.
  • [13:43] Don't overthink this. It's important to have a cohesive brand, but the content is definitely the most important part. Having a brand that you feel good about does help boost your confidence. Here are my three favorite resources to use for clarifying your brand.
  • [20:18] What I've found is that clarity comes from getting into motion. Commit to creating a weekly podcast, video show, or Facebook Live. This will help you find your audience and understand how your business and your ICA will come together.
  • [24:46] The answer is both! I use a teleprompter for certain things and go off-the-cuff for other things. Listen to find out!
  • [27:52] Ready for your life to change? Okay, flip the script! Change "I'm overwhelmed" to "I'm learning." Convert Kit is the platform I suggest in order to avoid frustration and to ease the learning process.

Now, be sure to head to our Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community to ask your #askamy questions! I can’t wait to hear them. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 20, 2020
#298: Releasing Control, Celebrating Your Successes, & Tossing Your To-Do List With Megan Hyatt Miller
44:59

What if I told you that the best way to accomplish your goals or dreams is to let go and be flexible with your strategy.

I know that at first glance this seems crazy, but stick with me. My brilliant guest, Megan Hyatt Miller, the Chief Operating Officer at Michael Hyatt & Company and the creator of the Bold line of the Full Focus Planner, has a sound approach to achieving your dreams without the pressure of controlling every single step. 

Now, you know me, and you know that this approach makes me squirm a bit (Hi, my name is Amy, and I’m type A!) but once Megan gave me a little more context around this idea, I started to understand how this approach can actually be extremely effective -- especially for entrepreneurs. 

Here’s a sneak peek of what Megan and I talked about…

  1. A strategy for getting crystal clear on your goals (clearer than you’ve ever been -- trust me!). 
  2. How to find a balance between trusting the process and being flexible with your strategy, versus being too lax and never accomplishing anything. (Nobody wants that!)
  3. How to get rid of your mile-long to-do list and identify your daily “Big 3” which will set you up to move you closer to your goal every single day. (Say goodbye to feeling defeated by your laundry list of tasks at the end of the day.)
  4. Why it’s necessary to slow down and celebrate your accomplishments… big or small. 

Check out some of the highlights from this episode...

  • [04:24] I adore this woman! Megan is a mom of five kiddos and the COO at Michael Hyatt & Company. And get this, she only works 35 hours per week. This allows her to accomplish her goal of winning at work and succeeding in life.
  • [10:42] You set a goal, create a strategy, and then life happens! You've probably been there. The issue is that most people get stuck in their strategy and can't move forward when things don't align with their plan. Ebb and flow with your goal and give yourself the freedom to do whatever is necessary to get back on track. 
  • [13:13] There's a difference between aspirations and actionable goals. Did you know that? Actionable goals have a deadline. Do you have aspirations or actionable goals? 
  • [15:54] If your goal doesn't feel a little risky, then let's be honest, it's probably set a little too low. Step out of your comfort zone at first so that you can create a new comfort zone.
  • [19:27] Listen, it's normal for things to not always work out. So, please, don't end up doubting yourself and giving up if this happens. Instead, give yourself time to tweak and refine your strategy and don't lose sight of your goal.
  • [23:55] The Full Focus Planner prompts you to select your "Daily Big 3" -- which my whole team loves! These are three things you accomplish every day -- things that drive results. Ask yourself, "What are the three most important actions that will drive your goal or business forward?"
  • [32:06] Here's my challenge for you, actually take the time to celebrate when you accomplish something. Especially if you have a team! Always acknowledge your accomplishments and have gratitude. 
  • [36:49] Winning looks different for everyone. Take the time to identify why winning looks like for you. Get creative and don't be afraid to ask for help. 

I know you’re going to absolutely love this interview as much as I did. 

Here’s what to do next, check out the episode, subscribe to the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast, and then head to our private Facebook community to your Daily Big 3 for today!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. And, your review might even make it onto an episode (how fun!) so be sure to leave a review and listen for it in my upcoming listener spotlights. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 16, 2020
#297: Grow Your Business & Revenue: 6 MUST DO Action Items to Make Magic Between Launches
59:19

Raise your hand if you’re not totally sure what to do between your launches. I totally get it. I was the same way for the first few years of my business.

The good news is that you can let out a big sigh of relief because I’ve put together the six most important things you should be doing between your launches. 

Here’s a recap of what I talk about in this episode, with specific examples.

Number 1, recharge, recharge, and recharge some more! Please don’t skip this one! It is so important for not only your health... but the health of your business (and your relationships) that you take time to recharge and reconnect with yourself and your loved ones. 

Number 2, build that list and batch that content! You know this is important… and the best part is that all of your list building efforts will pay off when you launch your course. 

Try it out and I promise you’ll be thanking me! 

Number 3, spend some time and money learning. Don’t be afraid to invest in yourself and your education because it is a vital part of growing your business and your income. Remember that you should not only create digital courses but consume them as well. 

Number 4, get to know your audience and get to know them well! Take your downtime to really understand who your ICA is and what she or he needs. 

Number 5, make some extra income. Yes, please! This one is a fun action item. 

Whether you promote a workshop course or become an affiliate -- this is a great way to make a little extra income while you’re gearing up for your pre-launch runway. 

Lastly, number 6… chip away where you can at your upcoming launch. 

Let’s take a look at a few highlights of this episode...

  • [07:01] You must take the time to refill your cup after a launch. Whether it's a staycation or a vacation, make sure you take time to do something different. And even more importantly, make sure you have this planned in advance. That's a requirement! 
  • [12:47] This is your core relationship building season -- your time to shine! Be sure to use it that way. Show up and offer your audience value. Because guess who is paying attention during these times? Your audience! Show up on whatever platform works best for you and your business. 
  • [31:03] Want to know how I boost my creativity? I consume content that is not at all related to my business... and I suggest you do the same! Listen to podcasts and read books that have nothing to do with the work that you do. Try fueling your mind by stepping outside of your area of expertise, and see what happens!
  • [36:27] Take this time to learn! Learn all that you can about your industry, your area of expertise, and growing your business. My personal favorite way is to consume digital courses -- go figure! Find out what my top recommended digital course is. Hint: it starts with "B" and ends in "School!"
  • [42:28] Become your audience's BFF! I'm serious. If you're struggling with this one, don't be afraid to use quizzes or polls to get to know them better so that you can serve them better!
  • [45:06] Use your precious downtime to make a little extra money by hosting or promoting a workshop or a two-hour paid training that you sell to your audience. Not sure what you'd talk about? Try this! Address an obstacle that your audience is struggling with. 
  • [51:33] Do what you can to prep for your launch during your off-season so that everything isn't last minute. I promise you'll enjoy yourself and the whole process much more.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 09, 2020
BONUS: The Detox You Need To EXPAND Your Dreams & Create A Life You Love with Teneshia Jackson Warner
41:15

When I say detox, I’m guessing your mind goes to green juice, kale, and hot yoga. 

But the kind of detoxing my guest and I talk about in this episode is very different. In fact, it’s one of the most important types of detoxing -- dream detoxing!

So what does that mean? My guest and author of The Big Stretch: 90 Days to Expand Your Dreams, Crush Your Goals, and Create Your Own Success, is going to help you understand exactly what a dream detox is and how to use it in your own life. 

Teneshia left her cushy, well-paying job to pursue her dream, and learned some mighty lessons along the way. She’s interviewed some of the top business moguls, such as Shark Tank’s Daymond John, Magic Johnson, Rent the Runway founder Jennifer Fliess and Me Too movement founder, Tarana Burke, all about what it takes to push the limits and stretch to follow your dream, fail, and create a life you love. 

Now she’s sharing what she’s discovered. 

Here’s a preview of what Teneshia and I talk about…

  1. The five types of dreamers (so you can identify which one you are).
  2. What dream detoxing is and why it’s essential. 
  3. How “feeding your spirit,” “fortifying your mind,” and “building your body” fits into success.
  4. Dream bullies… who they are and how they might be holding you back. (Hint: you have some closer to you than you think! Find out who Teneshia’s biggest dream bully was.)
  5. An exercise to help you identify where you are wasting your time and how you can create more time to commit to your dream. 

Here’s a breakdown of our conversation...

  • [05:13] Teneshia left her cushy, full-time job at IBM Mobile Services to follow her dream, passion, and purpose. She knew she was meant for more! Sound familiar?
  • [07:05] She defines "the stretch" as the expansion necessary to meet the best version of YOU. It's the distance between your comfort zone and your dreams. What would you consider your "stretch"?
  • [08:00] She has interviewed hundreds of iconic dreamers who said "yes" to stepping out of their comfort zones in order to follow their passion. It's these interviews that inspired her to create her business. 
  • [13:04] Curious to find out the types of dreams? There are five and they include careerpreneurs, make-it-happen dreamers, hobby dreamers, CEO dreamers, and activist dreamers. Which one are you? 
  • [20:50] A dream detox preps your mind, body, and spirit for cultivating your dreams. Teneshia challenges you to examine your beliefs, feed yourself only information that pushes you forward, and set your life up to support your passion and purpose!
  • [30:16] We even go over an exercise from Teneshia's book called, the "Time Audit" exercise. Essentially, you take a look at your week and find areas where you can be more efficient in order to achieve your goals and dreams! Listen to find out how to do this exercise in your life.

I’d love to hear what you learned from this interview. Head to my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community to share what dreamer you are.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 06, 2020
#296: How To Set Boundaries And Create Massive Personal And Professional Success This Year
48:36

“Machines are built to work 24/7, but not human beings. It's crucial that we put boundaries in place for ourselves, to have offline time, exercise and sleep, time with loved ones and friends and family that's not tethered to a screen. 

That's how we can start to get into the dance between being effective and productive with our time, and also being healthy, sane human beings.”

This brilliant quote is from my dear friend, Marie Forleo. 

She’s absolutely right! We not only need to be aware of how we set boundaries around our screen time, but we also need to set intentional boundaries around our business and personal life. 

In this episode, we dive deep into what boundaries are, how to set them, commit to them, and how to respect the boundaries of others in your life. 

Can I be honest with you? I haven’t always been great at setting and sticking to my boundaries. In fact, I had to learn about the importance of setting boundaries the hard way. 

However, over the years I’ve come to understand what areas of my life require boundaries, and, most importantly, how to stick to them.  

And before we dive into boundaries, one thing must be certain… your why for setting them. Take a moment to answer these questions.

  • Why are you committing to these boundaries? 
  • Why are you sticking to them day in and day out?
  • Why are they important to you? 

Being crystal clear on your why is essential if you’re going to make your boundaries a priority and actually work for you.

So here’s a glimpse of what you’re going to learn in this episode…

  1. What areas you may want to consider setting boundaries in and what non-negotiables are. (And where I set boundaries in my life.)
  2. Why you need to have strong boundaries as an entrepreneur and some specific examples of the ones I set. (Feel free to copy any of mine.)
  3. An exercise for getting clear on what your boundaries look like. 
  4. How to commit to your boundaries without feeling guilty or worrying about hurting the feelings of others.
  5. How to lead by example and respect the boundaries of those around you. 

Here’s a breakdown of the episode…

  • [04:45] What’s your why? Is it strong enough and have you been guilty of putting work before things that are actually important to you? I have! Make having a clear unshakeable why a priority.
  • [11:11] It’s time to get crystal clear on your time boundaries. Lay out what your ideal week looks like, your non-negotiables, and daily habits. Put these on your calendar before anything else and be honest about the cost of not sticking to these.
  • [19:37] You knew it was coming… you have to set strong boundaries around screentime and social media. My girl, Marie Forleo says it best, “Create before you consume.” Did you know that social media can deplete your juice? Yikes!
  • [24:12] Do you have set boundaries around your business? If not, you should! Here’s why.
  • [30:00] Often times when you’ve disrespected your own boundaries, you feel anxious or resentful. To avoid this, try performing a priority check where you identify and realign with your top three priorities.
  • [33:50] Ready for some tough love? If you don't set boundaries, the world tells you who you are and what you should be doing. Talk about scary!
  • [38:07] Solid boundaries serve as guardrails to our productivity. Look at what other people you admire are doing. Get very clear on your boundaries and write it down. Be specific.
  • [43:19] Successful people say "no" to almost everything. It’s true! Don't be afraid to say no to things that don't align with your boundaries.
  • [44:10] Respect other people's boundaries. The more we honor other people's boundaries the more they honor ours.

I want you to walk away from this episode with clear, intentional boundaries. 

Let me leave you with some wisdom from Miss Oprah...

“You have to be able to set boundaries, otherwise the rest of the world is telling you who you are and what you should be doing. You can still be a nice person and set boundaries.”

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jan 02, 2020
#295: How To Create Atomic Habits with James Clear
50:39

You guys know me, and you know how much I LOVE systems and really simple step-by-step strategies, and that is exactly how James Clear, my guest, and Author of Atomic Habits approaches creating good habits that yield remarkable results.

“You do not rise to the level of your goals. You fall to the level of your systems.” Let me repeat that last one again, “You do not rise to the level of your goals. You fall to the level of your systems.”

Oh yes, you know how much the systems girl in me just loves that!

In this episode, James shares his 1% approach to changing your habits, how your identity will either help you to succeed at achieving your goals or not, we talked about how to stay the course, even when you’re not seeing immediate results.

And this one is near and dear to my heart as I’m still walking through my weight loss journey. 

Here’s the best part of today’s episode, we talk about how you can start to create your own Atomic Habits so you can play a bigger game with your business and life in the New Year!

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

  • [05:13] James suffered a very serious injury when he was hit in the face with a baseball bat, which put him in a medically-induced coma. His recovery pushed him to focus on small habits to achieve big results. He found that following small habits gave him a sense of control in his life.
  • [07:38] After graduate school, James became an entrepreneur and found that he was drawn to studying consumer psychology so that he could better understand why people buy things. He discovered that he was fascinated with behavioral psychology and habit formation.
  • [08:44] James aims to be the bridge between scientific research and what it says about how habits work and practical application in daily use. The habits and practices he shares in his book are all about how to create small, powerful, and scientifically-proven habits into your own life.
  • [09:57] Habits are the compound interest of self-improvement! Believe it or not, getting 1% better each day offers significant results. James believes that it might be the only way change happens in the real world. He says that accumulating 1% improvements over time will actually get you the results you're looking for.
  • [15:37] An implementation intention means that stating your intention makes it more likely to happen. 
  • [17:04] The plateau of latent potential shows that the hallmark of any habit or thing you're trying to change is that the greatest returns are delayed. In fact, the hard work you're putting isn't being wasted, it's just being stored.
  • [21:46] Focusing on your trajectory instead of the position will help you to stay on course. Remember that every action you take is a vote for or against the person you want to become. True behavior change is identity change. 
  • [27:49] The four laws of behavioral change include: make it obvious, make it attractive, make it easy, and make it satisfying. The cues get your attention when you need a little reminder.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 26, 2019
#294: 5 Ways A Digital Course Will Boost Your One On One Business Revenue
44:33

Have you been wondering how a digital course can fit into your one on one business? If so, this episode is for you!

Now, if you’re thinking, “I don’t have one on one clients, so this doesn’t apply to my business,” stick with me, because I have some nuggets in here that might actually help your online business grow and generate even more revenue!

In today’s episode, we talk all about how a digital course can fit into your one on one business. And we even chat about how you can add one on one offerings to your online business to boost your revenue. 

I know that you guys have been wanting this topic because I get asked about it all the time! Today I’ll give you 5 valuable ways a digital course can transform your one on one business!

That’s right, I talk about how a digital course can transform your business revenue, give you more freedom (yes, please!), and how it will allow you to reach more people and transform more lives. After all, isn’t that why we’re all doing what we’re doing? To make an impact?

You’re going to walk away from this call with some great ideas for integrating your one on one business with a digital course.

Here’s a breakdown of some important points from today’s episode…

  • [05:01] A digital course will expand your reach! From a time and energy standpoint, you can only take so many clients. A course will give new clients the opportunity to work with you.
  • [05:53] One approach is to use your digital course as an extension of your one-on-one business. You can use your course to prepare your students and put them in a place to work with you one-on-one directly. 
  • [07:19] You could offer a digital course that complements the work you do with your clients but doesn't exactly mirror the work you do in your one-on-ones.
  • [11:37] Your one-on-one coaching could be used as an upsell to your digital course. 
  • [16:00] A digital course will increase your overall revenue. Setting your business up for passive income is really important, and it's something you can't do with a one-on-one service business. At DCA, we teach students how to move their course to evergreen. 
  • [21:14] Another way a digital course can seriously benefit your business is that it will allow you to set bigger income goals -- it opens the door for you to make more money. However, I highly recommend doing a few live launches before transitioning into an evergreen webinar.
  • [28:17] A digital course will allow you to be more selective about who you take on as a client. You can take fewer clients and serve them at a higher level because you're not stretched too thin and trying to balance a ton of clients.
  • [34:55] Offering both one-on-one coaching and a digital course gives you the option to offer tiered pricing. This can create opportunities for people with different financial means to work with you and makes high price point offerings a hot commodity.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 19, 2019
#293: 5 Unexpected Ways To Rethink Your Content To Build A Loyal Audience
46:04

I am so happy that you’re tuning into this episode because we are shaking things up and doing something different!

A few months back, I spoke at Stu McLaren’s TRIBE! event which aims to educate, teach, and bring together entrepreneurs around membership sites. And by the way, if you know me at all, you know that I adore Stu and his event was absolutely amazing.

At his event, TRIBE!, I spoke about my top content creation secrets that I like to use to keep my audience engaged, feeling that they are always receiving value, and coming back for more. 

I thought this information was so valuable that I wanted to share it with you. 

So today, because I just love you so much, you get VIP access to the recording of the presentation I gave! Now, these 5 tools for content creation will help you to rethink how you do content and make creating valuable, high-quality content easy. 

My goal is for you to walk away feeling inspired and excited to put these tools to work within your business! I know you’re going to love this presentation and get so much value out of it. 

Now, I just have to remind you that I ONLY teach what is working in my business, and today’s strategy is definitely working in my business! But, you’re also going to hear how I didn’t use one of these strategies and the lesson I learned from that experience.

Here is a preview of the 5 lessons I teach in this episode: 

Lesson #1: Let your paid content drive your free content! Whoa! What a concept, right? Now, I can hear you thinking, “But Amy, if I give away my paid content for free, why would anyone pay for it?!” 

Stay with me on this one. I promise there is a way to do this where you give just enough of your content to make them want more, which will lead to them signing up for your paid content!

I’ll show you exactly what I mean in this episode!

Lesson #2: The importance of repetition! You’ve heard me say this before (see how I practice what I preach?!) so it should come to no surprise to you that repetition is a powerful marketing strategy. 

In this episode, I’m going to show you why repetition is the mother of skill! I’m going to show you exactly what I mean by repeating your content and share with you WHY you want your audience hearing about your key concepts from you even before they buy!

Lesson #3: Share more scars than scabs! I know, I know, this analogy is kind of gross, but it gets the point across, right?

Here’s the thing, when you show your scars -- and stay tuned to find out what I mean by scars versus scabs -- you will truly elevate your audience's experience!

Lesson #4: Share your life but remember your why! Again, this all ties back to elevating your audience's experience and inspiring them to grow!

Now, I’m not overly excited to tell you this, but I failed to do this -- which is why it’s one of my lessons! And, since I’m committed to sharing my scars so you can avoid making the same mistake, I’m going to share exactly how I didn’t elevate my audience's experience and how, in hindsight, I could have!

Lesson #5: Superthinking is the secret to content that truly sticks!

Alright, time to get sticky! Multitaskers, come back to me now because if you take anything away from this episode, I want it to be SuperThinking! 

If you’ve never heard of SuperThinking, get ready to be mind-blown! This is my superweapon for becoming a creative genius in my business and content!

Now, the reason I’ve really been rethinking my content creation strategy is that, as I mentioned, we are launching Momentum, our membership site for students who have gone through my DCA program! 

And as you can imagine, creating enough content to make a membership site valuable can be daunting -- trust me, this is why I’ve pushed it off for as long as I have. And now that we’re launching it, I’m using this approach to make creating content for Momentum so easy!

Here’s a sneak peek of some of the highlights from my presentation…

  • [06:34] Your launch success is driven by how you show up when you are not launching. It's about the content you are creating and the value you're providing in between your launches.
  • [13:03] Let your paid content drive your free content ideas. I let my paid content drive everything I put out on social, and I'm never at a loss for ideas. Once my course framework is figured out, I have a wealth of knowledge to share as my free content. I also talk about where people might get stuck, their pain points, and the mindset blocks that are holding them back.
  • [18:06] Repetition is the mother of skill! I want people to have heard the content before so that they know what to expect and are confidently ready to move forward by the time they purchase my course. Don't be afraid to use your content across all of your platforms.
  • [22:25] Share more scars than scabs. Make sure your stories and experiences always elevate your audience's experience and add value.
  • [28:21] Share your life but remember why you're sharing it. It's important to share behind the scenes but don't forget the reason you're sharing it with them. How is it adding to their life or business?
  • [34:19] Super thinking is the secret to content that really sticks. When you create content that truly sticks, it comes from deep inside you. Spend an hour a week asking super thinking about your business!
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 12, 2019
#292: Student Spotlight: How This “Post Webinar Nurture Sequence” Led To Over $11,000 EXTRA In Revenue with Karida Griffith Walker
01:00:04

Let’s be honest, your launch runway and your webinars are the most exciting part of your launch! 

And if we’re being really honest, the time between your last webinar and your cart closing day, you’re most likely exhausted, and all you want to do is curl up to a good Netflix binge session -- at least I do!

And while it’s tempting to do just that, I find that this time (between your last webinar and your cart close date) is where getting scrappy and making a little post-webinar push can transform the outcome and revenue of your launch. 

One of my Digital Course Academy students, Karida Griffith Walker, decided to roll up her sleeves and get scrappy with her post-webinar nurture sequence -- despite having a cold and a household of stuffy noses!

Her commitment to showing up for her audience members who were on the fence resulted in over $11,000 extra in revenue and 20 new students in her digital course. That’s 58% of her revenue for this specific launch!

She even talks about having a coughing attack during one of her live Facebook videos, but that didn’t stop her from showing up. 

In this episode, Karida shares her post-webinar strategies and some seriously impressive numbers. Take a listen, get inspired, and start planning to use some of these post-webinar strategies for your next launch. 

Here’s a breakdown of what Karida and I chatted about…

  • [06:15]Karida was a professional dancer and Radio City Rockette for almost 5 years. She then left to pursue her passion for tap dancing, which led her to teaching tap to others.
  • [09:21] Karida got married and moved to Portland where she is raising her three kids. She wanted to combine her love of dancing and teaching and stumbled across Webinars That Convert. She knew that there was a need for tap dance teacher training, so she created her signature course The Tap Teacher Lounge.
  • [14:04] In her course, Karida uses slides, audio, and direct to camera videos of her actually showing dance moves to teach her students. She then allows them to send in videos for her feedback!
  • [18:21] In Karida's most recent launch, she had 204 people registered for her four webinars. She also did something really cool, she offered an "interested but can't attend" option for those who wanted to register. She had 105 people select this option. She had 15 people sign up during her webinars and 20 people sign up during her post-webinar efforts. Her 35 signups brought her $21,000 in revenue.
  • [23:56] If you pay attention to how your audience behaves—how they respond, what they need, what they want—you can get so many profitable ideas on how to cater to them and truly show up in a way that makes them want to buy. 
  • [24:35] After the webinar, Karida kept running Facebook lives where she tackled her customer's biggest objections and explained her tap curriculum and what her students would learn. She retargeted 240 people and spent $170 in ads -- that's it! This resulted in eight new purchases. 
  • [40:28] Karida had a totally different mindset with this launch. She got scrappy, because she wants to have a six-figure business. She was committed to her process and kept pushing all the way through the launch with her six-figure mindset!
  • [45:43] Karida touched on the importance of sending a sequence of post-webinar emails and why some people appreciate receiving them.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 05, 2019
#291: Master Live Video: How to Shift Your Mindset And Build Your Confidence
45:17

Your mindset is key. Whether you’re looking to build a business or create a life you love -- it all comes back to your mindset.

When it comes to building a successful online business, there’s no doubt that you’re going to have to get in front of the camera from time to time. But that doesn’t necessarily mean you’re going to love it! 

In fact, most people feel extremely uncomfortable in front of the camera, whether it’s for a Facebook Live or a webinar, which is why I’m sharing some of my favorite strategies for boosting your confidence in front of the camera. 

And you guys know that I haven’t always loved doing live videos. In fact, I can’t say I am jumping at the bit to do them now. 

However, I’ve definitely used these exact strategies to boost my confidence and feel much more comfortable jumping on to do a live video.

I want to challenge you to take these strategies and make them your own. Use them over and over to shift your mindset and boost your confidence so that whether you’re doing a Facebook Live, an Instagram Live, or a webinar, you feel like a pro and show up for your audience and boost your know, like, and trust factor.  

Go ahead and take these strategies to start creating real impact for your audience and for your business!

You’ll learn…

  1. The importance of creating a pre-live ritual. 
  2. How to shift your focus to what you’re offering your clients. 
  3. How you can use your audience's engagement to build your confidence and your content.
  4. Tips for prompting your audience with a cue. (Including the cues I use!)
  5. What steps to walk through to make sure you’re ready to do a live video or webinar.
  • [10:38] Create your own pre-live ritual. Create a ritual that you commit to performing each time before you go live -- this will allow you to automate your live video process and help you to become more relaxed and confident going live!
  • [14:29] You're going to have some messiness when you're first starting out and building confidence on live video. Committing to a ritual will help you feel more natural in front of the camera and rock your lives.
  • [15:54] Set an alarm 10 minutes prior to going live and get in the zone. Make sure everything is ready and then just allow yourself to settle in. Quiet your mind, look over your notes and allow yourself to find a sense of calmness.
  • [18:19] Your mindset will affect your energy for live videos. If you're distracted and don't take the time to get excited about your live video, your audience will know. Here's a tip for you: smile when you talk!
  • [20:32] Focus on what you're bringing to your audience. When you're worried about how you look on camera you're making the video about you and not your audience. Remember that you are doing live videos to support and serve your audience.
  • [29:26] Allow your audience’s engagement to build your confidence and your content. Treat every person like they are special, show up like a boss, and engage with them. However, don't worry about having a huge audience when you're live. Keep in mind that your video will live on and get views and shares.
  • [30:50] Ask your audience questions that relate to their pain point. Also, prompt them to share one takeaway or action item they are going to implement.
Nov 27, 2019
BONUS: Quadruple Your Marketing Budget Using Facebook & Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready
50:26

We all know that Facebook and Instagram ads can help get the word out about our products, help build our lists, and even sell products. Yet, many of you have unanswered questions. That's why today we are answering your 10 burning questions about Facebook and Instagram ads. Those who know me, know that I'm not an expert on this, but my Regis to my Kathy Lee, Rick Mulready is here today to answer all of those questions and more.

Today, we did our first live training in Momentum. The training ran over, and I had no buffer between that training and this call with Rick. We chatted a bit before recording, and Rick helped put me at ease. Rick has a huge heart. When he comes to my events, he ends up with a big long line of people wanting to ask him questions about ads and marketing. Even when he’s not a speaker. He opens up his computer, takes his time, and really gets into it with them. He holds court with them, and that’s what we are doing today.

This podcast is specifically for online experts or people who sell a course, product, or coaching. It’s for people who want to build their list and increase their sales, but haven't quite started using ads yet. It’s also for those who have started using ads, but maybe they aren’t working out as well as you thought they would. 

  1. [05:09] What objective do I choose to get people to register for my webinar? You have to choose between lead generation and conversion. Conversion is having people click on your ad and go to your webinar registration page. The thank you page is used as custom conversion tracking. In Facebook ads use the conversion objective not the lead generation objective. 
  2. [07:14] What's the most effective ad type? You have to test things out. Any ad can be effective. It's about testing to see what works for you. Using a Facebook Live as an ad is a great video option. Try an image, video, and carousel ad and see what works best. 
  3. [09:50] Should I target other Facebook pages or cold audiences? Warm audiences are people on our list or website visitors. Prioritize warm audiences first, and then create lookalike audiences to cold target. 
  4. [13:27] People often don't understand their target customer. You need a holistic understanding of your target customer to do well with ads. Once you know your target customer create sub segments. Don’t have one conversation for everyone. 
  5. [19:54] Why are ad costs rising? They are more advertisers than ever. More competition equals higher ad cost. It's also the holiday season. There's an election coming up. 
  6. [23:08] What's CBO or campaign budget optimization? This will be the default way to set budgets. Set the budget at the campaign level. The algorithm divides the budget by ad performance. You can still set minimums at ad set level. 
  7. [28:33] How do I know my ads are working? What's the cost per lead? You want at least 20% converting. Tools like Leadpages will tell you the conversion rate. Leads divided by landing page conversion. Focus on increasing rates and the consistency between the page and ad. 
  8. [35:25] What's the deal with video? Create ads with mobile in mind first. Create video for areas where people consume video. People who watch a certain percentage are engagement audiences. 
  9. [37:44] Why are my ads getting disapproved? This happens to everyone. Review ad policies and keep up with changes. Don't make promises or insinuate people are struggling with certain things. Speak to positivity and transformation. 
  10. [40:39] Do I need to run ads when I'm not launching? It's a better strategy to consistently run ads and build engagement and your list. Facebook rewards consistently running ads and that reduces the cost of your launch. 
  11. [43:23] Bonus tip: Mindset around testing. Keep testing until you figure it out and you will win. 

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Nov 22, 2019
#290: 5 Powerful Ways To Set Your Affiliates Up For Success
43:49

In this week’s episode, I talk all about how to boost your affiliate marketing game (and revenue) by loving up on your affiliates!

So when I'm talking about "loving up" on your affiliates, this means how you can help them to best deliver and succeed as your affiliate -- promoting your program or service.

Affiliates broaden your audience reach and because they’ve already established the know, like, and trust factor with their audience, your conversion rate will be higher than if you were to just target these audiences in cold ads.

This is why, in my most recent Digital Course Academy launch, I went above and beyond to give my affiliates a whole lot of love and attention, and let me tell you, it definitely paid off.

Today I want to share the specific ways I made my affiliates, like Jenna Kutcher, Stu McLaren, Kajabi, and Jill and Josh Stanton, feel extra special and important so that you can do the same for your upcoming launch. 

In this episode, I’m going to share 5 simple and powerful strategies to love up on your affiliates so they, in turn, go above and beyond to sell your course or service. 

You’re going to walk away from this episode with so many exciting ideas for your next launch!

Tune in to learn these 5 strategies (plus a bonus strategy!)...

  1. The top documents to create to keep your affiliates organized and in the know. 
  2. The power of using a Facebook group to inspire and connect with your affiliates. 
  3. Assigning one person on your team (or a VA) to give your affiliates extra care and attention. 
  4. Surveying your affiliates to improve your affiliate marketing strategy for your next launch. 
  5. The importance of starting out small. 
  • [08:38] We love to organize all of the information and details that our affiliates need to know into an easy to access Google Doc. This helps us make sure everything is in order before we even welcome affiliates. Having a doc like this also minimizes confusion and eliminates redundant questions.
  • [10:12] A sneak peek of all the things that we include in our Affiliate FAQ document -- from commissions to payment options and everything in between.
  • [17:17] Create a private Facebook group just for your affiliates to communicate with them before you actually open the cart, and continue communication and relationship building while the cart is open. This helps build hype and keeps affiliates in the loop.
  • [21:55] Consider assigning one person on your team to be your affiliate concierge. Assigning someone specific to the needs of your affiliates ensures that they are prioritized, heard, and treated with extra special care.
  • [25:10] Survey your affiliate partners post-launch to help you improve for your next launch, but also to make sure that you are creating solid relationships with your affiliates to ensure that they actually want to come back the next time. Getting post-launch affiliate feedback is crucial, so don't skip this step!
  • [27:57] Start out small. Take baby steps and be realistic about the number of affiliates you can manage. Having a couple of affiliates that are well taken care of is more important than having a bunch who don't sell because they don't feel special.
  • [36:53] Show gratitude and appreciation to your affiliates for their hard work -- this is essential! Don't be afraid to send them a gift or give them a call to show that you're truly grateful.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 21, 2019
#289: The Entrepreneurs Morning Routine (Including Tips to Create Your Own)
38:54

There are three kinds of people in this world. Those who have morning routines, those who don’t, and those who want to tell everyone else what their morning routine should be.

I definitely have one, and I love it. It’s a good mix of Scout, Peloton, and of course Hobie (when he’s home!).

Here’s the thing… I am not here to tell you how you should do your morning.

In fact, on today’s podcast I am giving you the inside scoop on the morning routines of some of my favorite people. When you listen, you’ll notice that no two are the same. Did I mention all of these people are very successful entrepreneurs with a lot on their plates?

As entrepreneurs, we get to design our own lives. We get to call the shots with how we spend our days and what we work on. Having a morning routine is a great way to gain focus and clarity and make sure the work for the day is the right work. 

I hope this episode inspires you to create a morning routine that works for you and your life and most importantly supports the big goals you want to achieve.

You’ll hear from…

  • [08:00] Jasmine Star needs slow mornings to facilitate creativity and productivity. She quietly does the things that her soul needs to optimize her creativity levels. She gives herself 45 minutes of utter decadence. She also gets two hours of unobstructed work time.
  • [13:18] Jennifer Allwood has four kids. Need I say more? Her mornings consist of getting kids out the door for the first two hours. And she still manages to get quiet time for the first 35 to 45 minutes of the day. She goes out to her deck with coffee. She thinks about her intentions for the day and what will actually move the needle. 
  • [17:50] James Wedmore makes sure his routine gets him excited to get up. He meditates for mental well being. For physical well being he uses an infrared sauna, the Peloton Tread, a Bellicon rebounder, and a BioCharger. Some days he just goes for a walk or swims in the ocean. 
  • [22:20] Julie Solomon began morning routines a few years ago, but made them too rigid. Now she sees her routine in a new way and it serves her far greater than before. Her routine is intentionally set up for self-care in whatever way it looks like for each day. 
  • [29:48] Stu McLaren starts with his five year old in his face asking if it’s time to get up yet. He doesn’t have a regimented routine in this season of life. His priorities are family time. His day starts and ends with his family. He takes his kids to school and gets his wife a cup of tea. He also takes his dog for a walk in the woods. 
  • [32:56] Kate Northrup has a different routine everyday, because of her two young children. She feels like her morning is not entirely within her control. She wakes up with the baby or when she is done sleeping. She takes a moment of gratitude. She has a cup of warm lemon water. Then coffee. She fits in a quick workout with her husband in the garage.

 

Nov 14, 2019
#288: How to Create a Pre-Launch Facebook Live Content Strategy
36:45

There’s one important factor that can either make or break your launch and it has nothing to do with how much money you spend on ads, how huge your list is, or whether or not your sales page copy is on point. 

One of the biggest predictors of launch success is how you show up for your audience in the 30 – 60 days before your launch. I don’t just mean writing a blog post or sending out an email every now and then. I mean putting on your planning hat and mapping out a series of Facebook Lives that both teach your audience something while also overcoming the common objections that come up when you go into launch mode. 

This pre-launch Facebook Live strategy has been a game-changer for me and I know it’ll be just as effective for you whether you’re just getting started or you’re a more advanced marketer. 

In this week’s podcast episode, I’m sharing all the behind-the-scenes details for my pre-launch Facebook Live strategy, including how to choose the topics you’ll go Live with, how often to go Live, and how to make sure that your Facebook Live viewers are primed and ready to register for your webinar and ultimately purchase your course. And by the way, I give you full permission to steal the strategy and make it your own. 

Here’s the breakdown:

  • [10:01] Once you know the topic of your course that you’ll be selling, you want to think about what you can present in your webinar that would be in alignment with and a perfect lead-in to that course. I break this down and share examples so the strategy will be super clear.  
  • [11:24] One of the best ways I’ve found to nail down a topic that would pique my ICA’s interest is to create a list of their objections, challenges, limiting beliefs and mindset blocks and then I create my Facebook Live content to counter those by presenting a solution that will help them achieve their desires and goals.
  • [13:42] To make it super actionable, I show you exactly how I take that list and turn each one into a Facebook Live topic. When you do this, you meet your customer right where they are and give them both momentum and traction — always a good thing! 
  • [25:13] These pre-launch Facebook lives are great for list building when you’re strategic with your CTAs (call-to-action). I talk about the lead magnets that did really well in my most recent pre-launch period.
  • [27:43] The key to any good strategy is to be open to tweaking and changing things up as you learn. I talk about the major tweak I’ll make with my next pre-launch content. Hint: I’ll be focusing much more on mindset. 
  • [30:35] Students often tell me they’re afraid they sound like a broken record when they repeat certain things when presenting their content. I talk about how repetition is actually a good thing because there are certain things your potential customer may need to hear more than once to make a buying decision. 

 

Nov 07, 2019
#287: How This Rocker Chick Combined a Membership and a Physical Product to Create the Perfect Experience
43:56

If you’ve been tuning in over the last few months I’ve been talking plenty about the power of membership sites, but today I’m sharing a whole new opportunity available to those of us who run a membership site to serve our audiences — adding a physical product to the mix!  

Erin Mullins Sanderson, better known online as Fit Rocker Chick, had no idea what she was building when she first started her membership site. All she knew was that she had a message to share and an audience that wanted more of that confident rocker vibe she embodies.

Erin’s story is super unique and something I think we can all learn from. She successfully launched a membership without even knowing what she’d offer, has grown that community to over 500 members, and has created a skincare line that her community went wild for. 

She’s clearly a woman of many talents, but what I adore most about her isn’t that perfect skin or her rockstar vibes — it’s her ability to take imperfect action and to really LISTEN to what her audience wants.

Today I want you to see how listening to your audience, thinking outside of the box, and doing something you’ve *always* wanted can amplify your audience experience AND help you boost your bottom line.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from my interview with Erin:

  • [06:47] How Erin felt a void with her group and wanted to bring them together. She ran the idea of a membership site by her list and found 100 beta testers to help flesh out her plan or lack of plan. 
  • [12:59] How Erin decided on what topics to cover each week in her membership. 
  • [14:30] Erin shares how often she goes live in the community, the type of heavyweight guest expert she features and the other fun aspects of being a member of her group (You’ll love her playlist and setlist ideas!)  
  • [17:03] How Erin’s members have become more courageous, started dreaming bigger, started new dream projects, became philanthropic, and left toxic relationships. These stories will inspire you! 
  • [24:18] How often Erin opens up her membership experience and the tools she uses to run her membership site.
  • [26:04] How the dream to create a skincare line came about.  
  • [34:32] How Erin made her community a part of the skincare product line decision-making process from the beginning. She talks about how she then launched her new product directly to her community, and it sold out right away. Her second batch also sold out in 48 hours. 

 

Oct 31, 2019
#286: How to Create a 7-Day Pop-Up Group to Boost Course Sales
50:56

I was recently in Toronto at Stu McLaren’s Tribe event and had an opportunity to record an interview with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five. Jill and Josh Stanton are two of my favorite people. Josh is hilarious, and I love talking with Jill. You know, I have so many good things to say about Facebook groups, but today is about using short pop-up groups to promote your offers. 

Jill and Josh used this method to promote one of their products and to promote my Digital Course Academy. They also threw in a fun twist by making five day challenges where they give a short challenge each day along with challenge marching orders. They also offer a prize to people who make it all the way through. 

These groups are a great way to warm up your audience or introduce them to a person or product that you would like to promote. Jill shares all of the tactics that she used along with some smart ideas to give the audience what they want and need without being pushy or overselling. This method can be used to create custom content and engagement for the right audience at the right time.

  • [07:31] You can create a timeline of four weeks, but for Jill and Josh, engagement started to drop off after a couple of weeks. They tested a two week group and the results were great. This is keeping people's attention for a shorter time and making a quick win. 
  • [10:14] Look at your offer and choose a congruent topic. Don't overwhelm people with the how-tos. Your offer is the how. You need to help them see the what and the why. Empower them to take action. 
  • [15:21] The what and why for Jill and Josh's Digital Course Academy pop-up promotion was Think Like an Expert - From Impostor Syndrome to Expert Status. They identified five core beliefs that were holding their audience back. 
  • [19:09] They ran a challenge on their last pop-up. They ran ads and spent about $42,000 and generated $293,000. They spent $10,000 to get 1200 super targeted people in the group. The one prior to that, they spent $4500 and made $43,000. 
  • [22:48] The challenges are short five minute videos that give a challenge and marching orders. The entire challenge has a prize incentive. Every day at 1:00 they would do a Facebook Live about the challenge of the day. No CTA but they are seeding the topic. 
  • [29:54] Pay attention to the objections you get when you make offers. You want to help the audience overcome their limiting beliefs. 
  • [31:04] Create content around the topic of your pop-up group and have your readers or listeners opt in. You're building your list and creating anticipation around an offer. People can opt in through messenger or email.
  • [35:29] Moving people from the challenge to the offer includes seeding throughout the content. You can move into a webinar, a free video series, a Facebook Live, and the cart opens on day five. When the offer closes, the group is archived. People who did join the program still get your support. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Oct 24, 2019
#285: 5 Crucial Lessons Learned From Creating My First Membership Experience
35:09

Some of you may remember me talking about my upcoming membership site, and how I was going to put it on hold for awhile. Well, I’ve found clarity, and Momentum will be launching in November. Tribe members and people who have listened to my episode with Stu McLaren know how valuable it is to be part of a membership site. 

Today’s episode is special, because I’m going to be talking about my own membership site, and I want to share with you some of the lessons that I’ve learned. Up until a few months ago, I had reached a point where I was really stuck in the process of creating Momentum. Since then, I have learned so much. I have had so much insight and clarity, that I wanted to share what I’ve learned and the big lessons with you. 

I think you'll get a lot of value from hearing about how we processed the information, how we went about putting things together, and if you do decide to create a membership site, you can walk away with these lessons already locked in. So, you my friend do not need to make the same mistakes that I made. Here are the five crucial lessons that I’ve learned so far. 

  • [06:48] The idea that I want to add so much new content. We want a community that is actively creating and launching courses. It's an extension of DCA to help implement the journey. We dive deeper into existing content to help implementation. We go from learning to doing. 
  • [12:17] Put a stake in the ground of who the membership site is for. By putting a stake in the ground, I had full clarity, because I knew exactly who I was doing this for. DCA alumni can grow with Momentum at a deep implementation level. 
  • [18:27] I've got to spend time with the content roadmap and revisit it. Each week something new happens. I follow the Tribe model. We have been talking about this for seven weeks. This is the first time I feel like I'm ahead of something. I have months to plan, so it feels good to revisit. 
  • [23:48] If it's not a hell yes, it's a hell no. I got to a point where it wasn't coming together, and it felt heavy. I wasn't excited about it, so I had to put it on hold. I couldn't get the content right, because I didn't know Momentum was just for my DCA alumni. Once I got clear on my ICA and got excited, I loved working on it.
  • [26:53] I come from a place of always being a student. I purchased Tribe and went through it. Our master doc is created from everything we learned from the Tribe experience. We followed everything that Tribe teaches. 
  • [31:36] When Momentum launches, I can't wait to share the new things we learn and the tweaks we make. We can make it better every month. DCA students will get an invite when their 12 weeks are over. 

This episode is sponsored by gravy. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans like I do for my online courses, you've got to listen up. One of my biggest frustrations was lost money due to failed payment plans. In fact, it used to keep me up at night. I would worry about all the people that were on a payment plan, because if they didn't finish that payment plan I was screwed. 

That's when I decided I needed to do something about it, because I hated the worry. I started to work with gravy, and I promise you I never worry about payment plans anymore.  Gravy sets up a system inside of your business where they contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer. 

Our failed payment recovery rate increased from 33% to over 80%.That's a whole lot of saved payments. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Oct 17, 2019
#284: The Better Buzz Strategy to Boost Engagement in Your Facebook Group with Dana Malstaff
59:18

If YOU have a community (free or paid) then you know ENGAGEMENT is the #1 metric for your success. Nobody wants to show up in a room full of crickets.

My friend Dana Malstaff, founder of Boss Mom and community creator extraordinaire is the queen of creating next level group engagement. That’s why I just had to have her on the podcast this week.

Dana’s Better Buzz Strategy has helped her create one of the most engaged communities I’ve ever heard of (70% monthly engagement with 40k members, say what?!).

Here are the six types of posts you want to be sure to utilize:

  • [29:49] The first type of buzz worthy post is a decision post. That answers a simple question to help you make a decision. Give three options, but don’t use a poll. It’s easy for people to engage, and the post stays alive. Then hop on a chat with your super engagers. You should be doing one of these a week.
  • [34:47] Opinion posts where you ask people what their opinion is. What are your top podcasts or number one blog? The best ones give you information on who to collaborate with and help you gain knowledge and insight. 
  • [37:37] Permission posts are where people tell a story or the hero’s journey. It creates a sense of belonging. Tell people they aren’t alone and create an appreciation loop.
  • [41:24] Can’t help themselves post. Telling people you just landed a client and asking them to celebrate or drop a GIF. Post something interesting where people can’t help but celebrate with you. 
  • [46:43] Ask is consistently telling people what you do. Let people know what you sell and what you want to be known for. 
  • [49:04] Authority posts. The easiest way to get authority is to get featured on podcasts. Also link to the post and mention it on Facebook live. 

Dana covers so much more in the episode. The first 20 minutes alone are pure gold, so tune in now and hop to it with applying these strategies in your communities!

 

Oct 10, 2019
#283: A Week in the Life (7 Days Behind-the-Scenes with Amy)
01:40:34

I know it might sound cliché, but I made a promise this year to be more vulnerable. To show you more of the “real” me. 

So for this week’s podcast episode, I’m doing something a little different and sharing a twice daily check-in for a full 7 days.

I hope that this lets you in on a few things. For one, I want you to know what a 7-figure course creator does in a week. You’ll hear it all; what I focus on, what I struggle with, and how I handle all of it.

I can’t promise it’ll be quite as engrossing as The Bachelor but if you’re anything like me, seeing into other people’s worlds is always a treat.

If you’ve ever wondered how I set up my week and spend my days, you’ll love this #nofilter episode where I share it all, including: 

  • Honest conversations Hobie and I have had recently that have been a little tough 
  • The new piece of exercise equipment I’m obsessed with 
  • The challenge the whole team is doing to be more intentional about what we do in a day, how we use our time, create morning rituals, and make extra time for what matters most
  • Why I started having a weekly date with my mom <3  
  • What it’s like going from a team of 3 to 10 full-time employees (and the essential books every single new hire gets) 
  • How the team operates for maximum efficiency (and how I really feel about meetings)
  • The inside scoop on my weight loss journey 

Here’s where you’ll find some of the highlights

  • [02:07] Sunday evening… weekly preview using the Full Focus Planner. This is about what the upcoming week will look like and what did and didn’t work from the previous week. Be intentional about how you structure your day. 
  • [07:32] Monday morning check-in. Morning walk with Scout and fiction audiobook. I also prepared for my FB Live session tomorrow. Phone call with team member. Recorded podcast ads. Hobie’s love language is quality time, so I have coffee with him from 8:30 to 9:00.
  • [13:33] Now I’m going to work on the quiz and then a team kick-off call. This is a one hour call with the entire team about what it looks like to launch digital course academy. Theme: We are master troubleshooters. 
  • [30:36] I do video on Tuesdays. Instagram story about launch. Facebook Live as part of DCA prelaunch. I also have a DCA affiliate Facebook Live. I don’t workout on video day. I do get a blow out. 
  • [41:38] Wednesday is podcast batching day. I’m doing 3 podcasts today, and some interviews as I grow my team. I also share my hiring process and the book bundle that I send to new hires.
  • [01:10:41] Thursday evening. I’m back from acupuncture. When I make mistakes that create stress, I know it’s time to fix the system. 
  • [01:15:44] Friday… Call at 7:00 am with weight-loss coach. Today, I’m recording the outcome videos for the DCA quiz. Then I fly to Portland, Oregon.
  • [01:25:50] On Saturday I met with my friend Mike Pacchione to work on presentation content. 

I hope you enjoyed the week with me. 

 

Oct 03, 2019
#282: 10 Ways to Repurpose ONE Single Piece of Content
35:00

You are going to love this episode. I give a step-by-step strategy on how to take one single piece of content and repurpose it 10 different ways. We all know how time-consuming content creation can be. 

After all that work, we hit publish and put it out in the world, but then it just sits there in that one location. Why not leverage all of that hard work by packaging the content up in different shapes and sizes and publishing it on different platforms? 

This makes your efforts more efficient and allows your ideal audience to consume your content in a variety of different ways. 

This is so smart. Repurposing your content should be part of your content creation process. Promise me that you won't let another week go by where you create content and only put it out one time and in one location. 

  • [07:49] Sit down and record your podcast audio. Make a video recording for extra mileage. Works best for interviews. Publish your audio wherever you normally publish your podcast. 
  • [11:10] Transcribe the podcast audio. Link to the transcript from your website show notes on it's own page that opens in a new window. This is great for SEO! 
  • [12:45] Show notes are the second way to repurpose your content. 
  • [14:26] Take snippets from the outline, transcripts, or show notes and craft an email that will notify subscribers about your new podcast episode. This is a great way to share weekly content and send weekly emails. 
  • [16:57] Pull out really good quotes or stats that can be turned into graphics. 
  • [17:41] Now that you have the show notes, email copy, and great quotes and stats, pull from those to create great social media posts. If you share the post on multiple platforms, tweak it so the language matches the platform. 
  • [18:48] Select a really juicy audio clip and use Wavve to turn it into a video highlight to promote your episode on social media. 
  • [19:46] Take the content you created and format it into an article on Medium.com. Anyone can post, and if you elect to have it reviewed by Medium curators, they will share it if they think it will benefit their audience. Or guest post on other blogs or online publication. 
  • [20:51] Create a freebie. Take the content and make a checklist, worksheet, or guide. You can use it to build your list or to promote your content or both. 
  • [22:30] Use parts of your content as an answer to frequently asked questions. When the same questions come up time and time again, and you have already covered it use that existing content to add to your website or course FAQ area. 
  • [24:34] It's all about video. This can be really valuable when you make the effort. Take your transcript and highlight sections that you could do a quick video about. 
  • [27:58] Bonus twist. Pay attention to what resonates with your audience. That can become a new piece of content. 

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about list building. If you've struggled with list building or you are not actively growing your email list, this class is for you. You know, everything in your business is easier when you have an email list. If you want to know what it takes to create a list building foundation from scratch, this step-by-step masterclass is for you. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Sep 26, 2019
#281: How to Plan Your First (or Next) Photoshoot
46:49

I've never loved having my picture taken.

But eventually, I learned to at least get comfortable with it.

It's so important that people see the real you. That your audience can connect with you and see you. Plus, you can use professional photos in soooo many places beyond just social media.

Today, I'm taking the guesswork out of planning your next photo shoot and sharing my top tips on how to show up feeling good, even if you feel nervous about having your photo taken.

I also created an extensive photoshoot guide that you can use to plan your first or next photoshoot like a total pro. Click here to download it now!

You’ll need these images for social media, guest posts, ads, sales pages, webinars, and more. When you know how to plan and organize a photoshoot, you'll not only end up with a bunch of amazing images to use, but you'll also save time and money by not having to hunt all over the place for your next image. 

  • [10:06] I want you to show up for yourself, even when it's way out of your comfort zone -- and I'll explain how to do that. 
  • [12:27] I talk about why it's important to start an inspiration collection of photos you love that would be a good fit for your personality and brand. Put together a fun playlist to make the photoshoot process more relaxing and fun. 
  • [14:33] How to find a photographer whose work you like, and you feel good about working with. Ask for recommendations. 
  • [18:13] I tell you how to put together a photoshoot inquiry communication that you can email to potential photographers and get a price quote. Everything to include is also in the Photoshoot Planning Guide.
  • [27:14] I'll help you to decide where to do your photoshoot. Hint: Your house with natural light is the best option. 
  • [31:42] I talk about how to find and nail a good pose that fits your personality. This can be very awkward but I've got tips for you to help the process be as painless as possible. 
  • [34:12] I get into all the day-of photoshoot details. We'll talk hair and makeup and how to let those first 15 minutes of awkwardness be what they are and pass by so you can create some beautiful photos. 
  • [40:01] I'll talk about what to do when you get your photos back from your photographer. If they're good and you like who took your photos, I want you to book them to come back and do another photoshoot in the months to come. 
Sep 19, 2019
#280: How to Do a "Course Call" to Validate Your Digital Course Idea with Jamie Trull
54:47

One of the best ways to know if anyone wants to spend time and money on your digital course is to ask them. One of the best ways to ask them is to have a course validation call with your potential customer avatar. These calls are so valuable, because they not only tell you if your course will be in demand, but they tell you exactly what needs to be in the course, the best ways to set it up, and how to market it.

These calls can be intimidating and people are often reluctant to have them, but the  information gleaned is so valuable. Course validation calls are a game changer. In my The Digital Course Academy, I teach you the exact questions to ask in these calls and how to find your ideal customer avatar ICA to have the calls with. This is important, because you want to make sure you have the call with someone who really is your ICA. 

Today’s show has a fun twist, instead of me telling you how to make a course call, I actually make one and let you listen in. It’s true that I already have a course, so this is somewhat of a mock call. But the rest is real. I have a real conversation with Jaime Trull about whether she would be a good candidate for the Digital Course Academy. 

It’s also true that I have never met Jaime before. I do know that she has an online business where she serves female CEOs and entrepreneurs in accounting, bookkeeping, and financials. She is a certified CPA, and she is thinking about creating a digital course. 

You have two goals during the call. Goal #1 is to uncover insights, fears, concerns, challenges, wants, and needs of your ICA. Goal #2 is to determine if your idea is on the right track. During the call, I actually learned some things that I wasn’t expecting. I also ended up giving Jaime a challenge, so this won’t be the last time you hear from her. 

  • [13:52] It's good to know about the background of the person that you are interviewing. Amy asks Jaime to tell her a little bit about her business? Jaime started Balance CFO to have more balance in life. She first helped friends with accounting, now she is focusing on virtual CFO work and financial literacy. Her problem is that one-on-one business is trading dollars for time. 
  • [17:35] Amy zeros in on the problem and asks about how many clients she needs to make the money she wants to make. They talk about scaling, frustrations, time, and revenue goals. Amy asks about Jaime's dream revenue model. 
  • [20:37] Jamie shares that her ideal day would be having more quality time with her kids. 
  • [21:52] Amy asks Jamie about frameworks. She does have a five step process. They also explore how Jamie could help her clients the most. 
  • [24:45] Digital courses have been on Jamie's radar. Obstacles are time and overwhelm with available resources. They also explore course ideas and niches to target.
  • [29:50] Amy asks about elements of courses that Jaime has taken and liked. She also asks about accountability. Jaime likes things broken down into doable steps. She also likes a community for motivation. 
  • [32:30] Amy digs into why Jamie hasn't already bought a course about creating courses. It's a commitment issue for Jamie. 
  • [33:23] Jaime has about 400 people on her list and a Facebook community of 1200. She built her community by going live every week and talking about things people wanted to know. 
  • [36:23] Are there any roadblocks in a course that have or would slow Jaime down? Technology is Jaime's biggest issue, and a clear roadmap with specific options would be best. 
  • [40:05] Where does Jamie spend the most social media time online and what is her focus? Her answer is Facebook, and she loves Rachel Hollis and the Rise groups and entrepreneurial groups. 

This episode is brought to you by: 

The Digital Course Academy sign up now or get on the waiting list. To find out if a digital course is right for you be sure and get The Three Behind the Scenes Secrets to Digital Course Success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Sep 12, 2019
How Making Wreaths As a Hobby Turned into a Profitable Digital Course with Lauren Kilgore
32:57

I’m so excited to share this digital course success story with you today. 

Lauren Kilgore, a wreath maker extraordinaire and accidental Etsy marketing superstar, turned her part-time hobby into $35k in revenue.

Unbelievable, right?!

Here’s the reason I’m sharing this with you today. We are all good at something that we could teach others how to do. 

For Lauren, it was selling her crafts on Etsy. 

If there is something you’re good at, something that people consistently come to you asking for help with, guess what? You might just be able to create a course around it. 

You don’t need to have it all figured out. Lauren is proof of that.

Tune in to this special bonus episode and find out exactly how a part-time wreath making mama went from making a bit of extra cash with a fun hobby to getting 93 students into her digital course and over five figures in revenue.


Ready to create your own Digital Course success story? Learn how to build, launch and grow a thriving Digital Course business without hiring a big team, the constant overwhelm or the momentum crushing question, "What the heck do I do next?"

Click here to save your seat in my free masterclass, The 3 Behind-the-Scenes Secrets to Digital Course Success!

 
Sep 09, 2019
#279: Should I Create a Digital Course?
33:46

Today I want to help you answer a very important question. 

And that question is… should you create a digital course?

More than likely, my answer to you will be yes.  

Now I know what you’re thinking. What in the world would I create a course on? The market is saturated. There are so many people selling courses online. But I promise that no one is teaching what YOU would teach the way that YOU would teach it. 

So here’s what I want you to do:

Step 1: Listen to this episode and learn about the five main types of profitable digital courses.

Step 2: Take my free quiz and find out which of those types is best for you (or if you should hold off on creating your course for now!).

My team and I put a lot of work (and love) into creating this quiz and I hope it helps you get the clarity you need to take the next step forward. 

Already took the quiz and want to learn more about each course type? Here are the highlights:

  • [08:59] The Workshop Course. This is a two hourish training that promises instant clarity and results. 
  • [15:43] A Starter Course. A jumping-off point to get your students started in your area of expertise. 
  • [19:41] The Spotlight Course. Dives deep into one main area, you’ll help your students produce very specific results in just one area. 
  • [22:36] A Signature Course. A complete comprehensive system, the Mack Daddy of all courses. It’s specific and detailed and includes your entire framework from start to finish.
  • [29:03] The Certification Course. This is as in-depth as it gets. You are teaching others your methodology and process in such a detailed way that they’ll be able to teach it to others. 

Take the Quiz Now!

Sep 05, 2019
#278: Case Study: How an Accidental Course Creator Generated Over $200K with Just One Launch
56:39

Would you believe me if I told you that one of my star students generated well over 6 figures on her very first launch?

Would you believe me if I also told you that student was an elementary school teacher?

How about a mother of five? 

Well, friend, I’m here to tell you that Jamie Sears did just that. It all started when Jamie’s hubby listened to a podcast episode about courses and nudged his wife to have a go at creating one. 

Jamie resisted at first. At that point, she didn’t even have a solid course idea. What really lights me up about this story is that Jamie didn’t let uncertainty or lack of clarity stop her from taking action. She saw the possibilities a course would offer and she moved forward one step at a time. 

Tune and and learn all about…

  • [05:16] The grassroots origins of how Jamie created online resources for her students, and other teachers started asking her for help
  • [07:02] There were so many questions that Jamie felt like she should make a course about writing. Her husband recommended that she join the Digital Course Academy. 
  • [09:38] Jamie went where her students hung out, listened to their questions, and did Facebook Lives when her audience was still small. She kept showing up. 
  • [13:30] Jamie not only got huge results in Digital Course Academy, but she followed the framework and made it her own as she progressed.
  • [15:20] Jamie’s wall of post-its and what her kids helped her see about her course
  • [17:58] How Jamie grew her list by 7000 new subscribers during her launch (without spending a ton on ads)
  • [24:39] Jamie’s mind-blowing pricing and results
  • [27:15] How Jamie got testimonials before her launch was even through
  • [51:01] Don't try to do what everyone else does just go to where your people are already at. 
Aug 29, 2019
Everything is Figureoutable with Marie Forleo
58:06

Marie Forleo has been an inspiration, a friend, and a mentor to me ever since I left corporate and started into the world of online business.

When it comes to business she's seen it all, from humble beginnings offering life coaching for free to being on stage with Oprah (yes, that Oprah). Needless to say, she has accomplished a lot.

Marie feels strongly (and I agree!) that we need more brilliant, creative humans to believe in themselves so that they can go out and make a difference in the world. That was the inspiration that pushed her to write her brand new book, Everything Is Figureoutable.

I recently sat down with Marie to talk about the book and I picked out topics that I thought would be especially helpful for you to hear. Marie held nothing back and shared some gems that I know you're going to love. This episode will have you feeling like everything really is figureoutable.

Here’s a sneak peek of what we covered:

  • How Marie finally decided to write her book (and why she waited, even after being courted by publishers)
  • Listening to that little voice in your head (Marie tells how her mom was the first to teach her about this inner guidance system!)
  • Marie's quick test to determine whether you're acting out of fear or intuition
  • How your beliefs are shaping you (a great model that I've been following for the last year, but Marie takes it even deeper)
  • Calling out your excuses (she explains how a slight change in semantics can be a game-changer in your life and business)
  • What to do when fear creeps in (and you know it will!) 
  • Getting clarity on what you actually want (believe it or not, most people are not crystal clear on what they want to create, but there IS a way to get clear)
  • Avoiding the pitfalls of perfectionism (learn about the severity of the destructiveness of perfectionism)  

You’ve gotta get your hands on Marie’s book, Everything is Figureoutable. Pre-order it now and get the 5-day coaching experience that Marie's offering to all pre-orderers.

 

Aug 27, 2019
#277: 3 BIG Decisions I Wish I Had Made Sooner (and Why You Should Make Them Now)
24:47

Mistakes are a part of life, but in my book the fewer things you have to learn the hard way, the better.

When it comes to sharing my blunders while building an online business, I’m an open book. This is the stuff that I WISH someone would’ve shared with me when I was just getting started. 

There are a lot of mistakes that I’ve made that I’m grateful for. Mistakes that helped me learn pivotal lessons that I wouldn’t trade for the world. But lately, I’ve been reflecting on some of the big decisions that I’m making now that I wish I would have made sooner. 

Wanna know the 3 decisions I wish I’d made sooner in my business?

I’m digging into the details on this week’s podcast episode… here are the highlights:

  • [02:15] The first decision that I waited to make until I was making good money was to hire someone to help me manage it. Plus, I’ll tell you how Hobie and I picked an advisor to help us.
  • [07:00] I waited way too long to grow my team to match the big vision I have. 
  • [13:45] Think about accountability and organizing how your team moves towards your goals.
  • [15:32] I share how I had a false belief that I needed to make tons of money before I set clear boundaries or rituals in my life that would allow me to take off. Boundaries protect yourself, your sanity, and your mindset.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Aug 22, 2019
#276: How to Overcome the Most Common Objections When Selling Online
41:27

I’ll never forget my first webinar.

But not for the reasons you might be thinking.

There I was, confident and ready to rock it, when suddenly the objections started pouring in. I felt defeated and disappointed.

I want to save you the pain I experienced on that webinar with today’s episode.

Believe it or not, it’s absolutely not necessary to let objections get the better of you. They’re not scary when you know how to handle them.

When you know what’s holding people back from saying heck yes to your offer, you can address their hesitation head on. You don’t have to tiptoe around it — instead, you can have a conversation.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from this episode: 

  • [05:11] The best place to address objections (hint: it’s not necessarily on your webinar or sales page)
  • [07:32] What to do on the front end of your offer so that common objections never even make an appearance.
  • [11:20] The truth about money objections 
  • [17:11] The key differences between features and benefits
  • [19:09] How to find “tiger” time.
  • [26:35] Marie Forleo’s “I have to talk to my spouse or business partner” script.
  • [29:35] How to get to the root mindset of "I'm not good at xyz." 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 15, 2019
#275: 10 Ways to Get Your Students to the Finish Line
47:22

Research shows that only 1 in 5 people who purchase online courses complete them.

As a course creator, that stat keeps me up at night and more importantly, compels me to take action.

Over the years, I’ve become obsessed with finding ways to beat those odds. And I’m sure if you’re reading this, you want every single person who buys your course to cross that finish line as well.

If you want amazing case studies and testimonials (the best marketing fuel there is), you’ve gotta do everything in your power to not just create the best course you can — but to ensure you’re helping your students get the results they signed up for. 

Now if you’re freaking out reading that, don’t panic. I’ve done a lot of the legwork for you and I’m sharing everything I’ve got today to help you get your students from point A to point B.

Haven’t created your course yet? Even better! Thinking about these strategies before you develop your course puts you ahead of the curve.

So grab your notebook and sharpen your pencil. Even if you implement just 2 or 3 of these ideas it will make such a difference for your students’ success.

  • [10:30] Emails aren’t just for marketing… a solid onboarding email sequence sets the pace and gives clear steps about what to do next. Email weekly with each module and think about where they are in the process. These emails can meet your students right where they are and get them all the way through to that finish line.
  • [16:28] Set clear expectations. Let people know how long it takes to actually implement the concepts. Ask what your students need to know.
  • [20:58] Accountability. You can pair people in your group together to be accountability partners. 
  • [23:49] Create a weekly challenge. Pick an existing area to highlight, don't add more content (aka work).
  • [25:52] Gamification or give awards for completing the challenges. Encourage good behavior and let people know you recognize them. 
  • [28:48] Allow and encourage your students to put their work in Facebook for feedback. Choose a day, once a week, so people can post and ask for feedback. 
  • [31:40] Course structure. Structure your course in a way that isn't overwhelming. Use short videos and frameworks that illustrate what you're teaching. 
  • [35:07] Real time check-ins. Jump on Facebook live or use other resources and give clarity about those places where people are getting stuck. 
  • [37:46] Have weekly Q and A's. As a course creator, you get to decide the length and frequency of your Q and A's. 
  • [39:46] Manage the mindset of your students. Great content isn't enough. Your student's mindset, roadblocks, fears, and negativity need to be addressed. 
  • [43:29] Bonus Strategy - create a bonus that helps students recoup the cost of the course or gets them organized or helps them find the right mindset. 

Here are the basics of our accountability cheat sheet:

  • Meet once a week, same time, same place, online using something like Zoom.
  • Outline three action items you can commit to doing over the next week.
  • Check in on whether or not you did what you said you would do the previous week. 
  • If not, what were the challenges?
  • What’s your game plan to overcome these challenges next week?
  • What do you commit to accomplishing for the next week?

This episode is brought to you by Gravy. If you have a subscription-model business or offer payment plans, like I do for my online courses, Gravy can really cut down on frustration and lost income. After I started working with Gravy I stopped worrying about payment plans. They contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer.

Our failed-payment recovery rate increased from 33 percent, when we were trying to do it internally, to over 80 percent, collecting on failed payments. That's a whole lot of saved payments. So if your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy. The cool thing is Gravy is waiving the setup fee for all of my listeners. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 08, 2019
#274: 3 The Pre-Launch Facebook Ad Strategy, with Rick Mulready 
48:16

On this week’s podcast episode we’re digging into 3 powerful (and surprisingly simple) FB ad strategies designed to fuel your pre-launch fire.  

The pre-launch phase is that crucial 60-90 day period leading UP to your launch that can make a world of difference when it comes to increasing your reach and revenue. If you play your cards right, you’ll find out that launching doesn’t have to be hard, stressful, or time-consuming.

I’m joined by the Regis to my Kathy Lee —  my dear friend and our resident FB and IG ads expert, the one and only Rick Mulready. 

Rick’s been on the podcast before, but today he’s sharing his favorite paid traffic pre-launch tips, including: 

  • How to use FB ads even when you’re on a tight budget and why you SHOULDN’T hire out your ads right away.
  • The power of crafting content around objections and how to do it.
  • The strategy that ensures by the time you open the doors to your webinar, your people are READY to learn from you and hear your offer.

And so much more. Make sure you have your notebook ready!

  • [08:32] What exactly IS the pre-launch period and why it’s so important
  • [12:22] Using video to create value and overcome objections and how best to optimize your ads 
  • [21:30] You can also use video to test target audiences. Right now the more fun and sometimes the sillier or less polished the videos are the better they do. Just make sure to have good sound and lighting. 
  • [25:16] Create a lead magnet that aligns with the launch, provides a quick win, and adds value. This builds trust and rapport. 
  • [28:13] Try for a 90-day or at least 60-day pre-launch where you are building a list of your target audience. Run ads and get people to sign up for your lead magnet before your webinar registration. You can also create a look-alike list of your target audience to run your ad to. 
  • [30:33] Why and when to use pop-up Facebook groups to create engagement and attract an audience for your launch. 
  •  [38:02] How running ads consistently throughout the year will save on your launch costs 
  • [40:11] Bonus strategy: Running a quiz with ads. This gives people a quick win and it's great for segmenting people to attract your ideal audience. Have a well written quiz with a really good ad strategy to go with it. 

This episode is officially sponsored by Rick's program Foundations, which is about getting started with Facebook ads and Instagram ads. It's a really great program. He teaches how to create ad campaigns in both Facebook and Instagram that will build traction and get your launch or list or group off the ground.  

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 01, 2019
#273: How to Build a Self-Managed Team with Theresa Loe
43:17

I never imagined myself having the team I do now. I also can’t imagine subscribing to the old idea of what it means to be a “boss”. 

I've learned a lot about what works and what doesn't when it comes to working with a team, especially with all of the hiring we've been doing over the past few months.

That's why I was so excited to sit down with Team Building and Leadership Coach, Theresa Loe to talk about building a self-managed team.

I truly believe that building a team that’s aligned with your values is one of the secrets to not just building more revenue or success, but to enjoying the process.

If you’re thinking “Amy, I’m so not even close to ready to build a team” — hey, that’s okay! 

But when you are ready (and trust me, one day you will be and it might come sooner than you think) this is the kind of insight I want you to have so you can save yourself from making painful hiring mistakes (trust me, I’ve been there). 

Theresa has cracked the code on how to find, grow, and lead a self-managed team, and she is sharing her best insights today:

  • [11:17] Having a self-managed team means putting yourself in the CEO position and having people under you who are all responsible for their own projects. When you have a great idea the team can execute and make it happen.
  • [13:58] Mindset is the number one strategy for building a self-managed team. Think about what you want your day to look like, and then slowly reverse engineer how to take everything else off of your plate.
  • [18:01] Hire based on attributes. Make sure they are aligned with you, your vision, and your core values. People can be trained on tools but not on character. Write down the attributes that you want then put up a gauntlet to see if applicants have these attributes.
  • [26:43] Hand off responsibilities, not tasks. Make everything a project. Instead of a one-off blog post, make them responsible for content management including scheduling, analytics, and reporting.
  • [29:39] Communication is key. Have a clear description of what "done" means. Be very clear about expectations but nurture your team to make decisions for themselves.
  • [33:18] You can create a feedback loop by recording any changes that you had to make to a project. Empower your team with resources.
  • [35:20] You can start small and hire someone for a few hours a week. You need to look at those freed up hours as gold and use them for money-making activities to free up cash to add more free hours.

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about kick-starting your list building efforts. You need to grow your email list every day to have a healthy business. All of the social media posts in the world can't do for you what a viable email list can. 

Jul 25, 2019
#272: My Biggest Regret After 10 Years of Building My Business
50:51

This is one of those super uncomfortable moments when I have to admit…I don’t have it ALL figured out.

Recently, I was at the EntreLeadership live event and Dave Ramsey’s words cut right to my soul. He said, “Organizations are never limited by their opportunity or their team, they are limited by their leader.

And the honest truth is, I regret not putting more focus on being a better leader for my team much sooner than I did.

No one is born with amazing leadership skills. They take years to develop and the earlier you start, the better off you’ll be. 

Because here’s the truth: you can’t build an empire by yourself. 

Eventually, you’ll need to bring people on who stand behind your vision and are just as motivated as you are to achieve it. 

As my business grows and scales, my job is to be a visionary and show up for my team as a leader in a stronger way. I’ve always thought of my students and my business, but now it’s time to focus on creating a bigger stronger team of people who are empowered to make decisions, come up with ideas, and grow with my business.

EntreLeadership was one of the best events I’ve attended. It blew my mind. After it lit a fire under my chair to become a better leader, I knew I had to share my biggest takeaways with you.

I hope you learn from these and implement them into your business right away. Do not pass go, just do it. I promise you won’t regret it.

Here are the main takeaways:

  • [15:00] There’s always room for improvement, no matter how ‘big’ your organization is.
  • [16:12] Takeaway #1: Dave Ramsey shared how organizations are never limited by their team. They are limited by their leader. (This one really hit me in the gut!)
  • [19:38] Takeaway #2: Henry Cloud asked, “Does your team know how you are going to win?” It’s important to define what winning looks like for yourself and then share it with your team. 
  • [23:39] Takeaway #3: Patrick Lencioni dropped a major value bomb when he said that fear of conflict will stifle productivity and keep you playing small. He explained that you’re cutting yourself short if you’re not encouraging your team to show their opinions even when they are challenging. 
  • [32:43] Takeaway #4: Patrick Lencioni also talked about hiring people that are humble, hungry, and smart. He explained that these type of people lack excessive ego, are self-motivated, and use good judgment with people. 
  • [39:32] Takeaway #5: Jesse Itzler shared his motto of “remember tomorrow.” He encourages you to ask yourself how you will feel tomorrow about any decisions that you make today. Listen to learn how I’ve implemented the Full Focus Planner with my team.
  • [43:41] Takeaway #6: Sara Blakely, the creator of Spanx, told the story of her early days in the business where she went above and beyond to educate customers on her product — she would go to the department store and talk to customers. She’s such a good example of never being too proud to get in there and do the work and get your hands dirty. 
  • [48:13] Extra Credit: Write down three things that you would love your team, or your team of the future, to say about your leadership style. I’m doing this exercise too and I wish I would have asked myself this question years ago. Don’t wait. 

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Jul 18, 2019
#271: How to Create a Profit-Driven Lead Magnet to Boost Sales
40:09

If you’ve been around for a bit, then you know my motto is always be list building. Now, while there are all kinds of list-building strategies, there’s one that's by far the easiest way to grow your email list, and that's by offering a lead magnet.

Through all of my endless list building experiments, I’ve learned how to create incredibly valuable pieces of content, like cheat sheets, guides, and mini-trainings.

But do you know what kind of lead magnet is the best, hands down?

A profit-driven lead magnet.

Now, I know what you're thinking... "Amy, a lead magnet is something I give away for free. What the heck are you talking about when you say 'profit-driven'?"

Here's the deal. Most of the time, when somebody signs up for your email list, they are just not quite ready to buy from you yet. When you create a profit-driven lead magnet, you are creating a tool that leads your new subscriber to a buying decision while also providing incredible value.

With this very intentional strategy, you will be generating revenue faster than you ever thought possible!

In today's episode, I talked about the three main questions you must ask yourself before you create your profit-driven lead magnet, and they are:

  1. What do you currently sell or plan to sell in the future?
  2. What does your ideal customer avatar need to understand, be aware of, or believe in order to want or need your product, program, or service?
  3. What type of lead magnet could I create that will compliment or align with the product, program, or service I currently sell or plan to sell?

I love a good example that illustrates what I'm talking about and I've included the two examples of profit-driven lead magnets that I talked about on the show below.  I hope those will get your creative juices flowing!

Example #1: My Own Lead Magnet, "20 Smart Strategies to Rapidly Grow Your Email List"

Why Example #1 Works:

  • It inspires.
  • It's actionable.
  • The cheat-sheet gives the what, and my course gives the how.

My ideal customer avatar and I are now in a conversation about how I can help them. Now, each week, I can continue the conversation with my ongoing weekly content.

Example #2: Corinne Crabtree's Free Course, "THREE Things You Must Know to Lose Weight"

Why Example #2 Works:

  • She makes it doable.
  • It gets people results (for free).
  • It attracts the right audience.

Corinne meets people right where they're at in their journey. Her course name is simple, clear, and to the point. Right away on the thank you page, she shares her journey in a video (and still directs her audience to check their email for more).

Episode highlights:
  • [06:49] 99% of the people who give you their email address aren't ready to buy. It’s up to you to walk them down that path. Create your lead magnet with your end goal in mind, and your end goal is to attract paying customers.
  • [14:04] Example #1 my lead magnet for List Builder's Society (see image example below).
  • [21:13] Make sure your lead magnet meets the customer/buyer where they are at. Profit-driven lead magnets are very intentional, specific, and sometimes only used for launches. There is a difference between a really good lead magnet and a profit-driven lead magnet.
  • [26:44] Example #2 from Corinne Crabtree (see image example below).

 

Jul 11, 2019
#270: Behind the Scenes with My Better Half, Hobie Porterfield
46:19

Ring the fire alarm because my better half, Mr. Hobie Porterfield, is lighting this place up! I’m super excited to have him back on the show, because I love sharing this side of my life. It may not always be unicorns and rainbows, but it’s pretty special.

Hobie puts fires out for a living, but he also helps me put fires out in my business. If it weren’t for his emotional support, I can’t say I’d be where I am today. He’s my biggest cheerleader, my biggest supporter, and he picks me up when I’m down.

We have learned and grown so much together. I just love having him on the show to share how we juggle laundry, launches, and everything in between as a team. This is an inside look at how we communicate about our needs, managing time and money, and our big goals.

You sent in some amazing questions. We’ll try to answer them, and hopefully, some of the things that we’ve learned and shared will help you not only in your business, but in your relationships as well.

  • [03:15] Hobie does more of the housework, and he likes to rub it in 😉remind me of that.
  • [06:26] Hobie doesn’t mind listening to me talk about my work, because it gives him a connection into my world.
  • [09:25] We sit down multiple times throughout the year and schedule everything
  • [13:39] When it comes to money and investing – getting a financial planner is one of the smartest things you can do.
  • [18:53] Why Hobie doesn’t go to conferences with me
  • [23:52] What would happen if we swapped roles for a day.
  • [25:49] Hobie talks about how he feels about me making more money than him
  • [29:28] How my weight loss has changed how we spend our time
  • [37:47] Hobie shares his amazing proposal plan that didn’t quite work out as planned. We also get a little personal with what annoys each other and how much fun we have.

 

 

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Jul 04, 2019
#269: Small List Superhero: How To Have A Profitable Launch Without A Big List with Tarzan Kay
45:39
  • “Amy, can I still launch my course if I only have 500 people on my email list?” 

    Ambitious course creators ask me variations of that question at least once a week.

    It’s easy for the size of your list to become one more excuse not to launch.

    My guest today is someone who had a successful launch with a list of 750 subscribers. Tarzan Kay has had not just one but three successful launches with a small list. In this episode, she shares her tips and strategies and walks us through her inspiring launch success.

    Tarzan is a launch strategist and email copywriting expert for online entrepreneurs and digital-course creators. Her specialty is fun-to-read, more-addictive-than-Game-of-Thrones copy for digital-course launches. 

    In her own business, she uses my special webinar framework —shout out to my Digital Course Academy members! In fact, she's used it over and over to sell her own courses, fill her private mastermind, and even had the occasional $100,000 month while working 30 hours per week and being the sole provider for her family of four. 

    I know you’re going to love this episode. Tarzan’s tips are useful for anyone who wants to deepen their relationship with their list, big or small. 

    • [14:33] Start thinking about how you can build relationships with individuals on your list, so they know that you're real and that you are going to deliver for them.
    • [15:45] Launching takes courage. Those who are successful launch through the fear and keep doing it again and again.
    • [16:23] More than revenue comes out of a launch. You get opportunities to speak, be on podcasts, build relationships, partner, and more.
    • [20:12] Tarzan uses a tool called BombBomb to send personalized videos to people who were active on her webinars. She also puts their names on her whiteboard. Email your list weekly and start a conversation. You can even hop on calls with people from your list. 
    • [26:50] Tarzan knows how to speak to the different personality types on her email list… and she breaks it down for us in Game of Thrones characters to make it easy to understand.
    • [32:17] All of your emails won't appeal to everybody, but there is definitely a way to make them appeal to more than one group at once.
    • [35:44] The number of people replying to your email is a great metric to judge whether they liked it or not.
    • [37:01] A nurture sequence comes after a new subscriber has opted in to get your freebie. Put a lot of energy into showing them your personality.

    Click here to listen now!

Jun 27, 2019
#268: LinkedIn Tips and Tricks to Attract a Bigger Audience with Viveka von Rosen
43:50

I get so many questions about LinkedIn. You’ve been asking how to use it for your audience, for list building, and what’s working right now.

I decided to bring in the big guns and invite world-renowned LinkedIn expert Viveka von Rosen on the show. Viveka is the author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and LinkedIn: 101 Ways To Rock Your Personal Brand: Grow your network and build your business!.

She is also a personal branding expert, LinkedIn Learning author, international keynote speaker, and has been recognized as a top LinkedIn and social media expert. She contributes to many major publications and has even been featured on two movies about social media. She is co-founder of Vengreso which provides digital sales solutions.

I’m so glad to have her here today to talk about what is currently working on LinkedIn, strategies for B2C clients, what is coming up with video and LinkedIn Live, and so much more. She even gives us actionable steps to transform our profile to sell in a non-salesy way and use content to nurture and grow relationships.

  • [06:08] Diving deeper is the strategy that worked for Viveka. She was also able to learn the platform inside and out, build relationships, and stay top of mind with her audience.
  • [14:25] You can repurpose blog posts on LinkedIn by clicking on "write an article" and pasting that article in LinkedIn Publisher. Other great ways to repurpose content is to add images to your article, create a PowerPoint presentation, and publish it as a document. Videos can be uploaded as native video or in the soon to be released LinkedIn Live.
  • [16:07] Position yourself as a thought leader. Make your background image about your product and have your summary read like a sales page (but not salesy). Who are you helping? What are their pain points? What is your solution?
  • [21:47] Selling is about being human and relationships. Know your audience and speak to your audience and don't worry about people self-selecting away from you.
  • [27:51] The secret recipe is to share something every day and create a long-form post once a week. For the long-form post use 1200 to 1400 characters and emojis to share something of value. Shoot and upload a relevant video or PDF, PowerPoint, or infographic for 10X the number of views. Use LinkedIn messaging to create a sharing fan club.
  • [33:22] A great way to get access to a B2B prospect is to interview the influencer in that company. This is how Viveca and Vengreso have been able to start the conversation for six- and seven-figure deals.

This episode is brought to you LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they're engaging every day and when they're ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn.

When you advertise on LinkedIn, you're attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

 

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 20, 2019
#267: Are You Known for Something Specific in Your Biz? If Not, Here’s What to Do
28:58

If you asked your customers or fans what you were known for what would they say?

We’ve all got that special something that we want to be known for. That thing that attracts your customers to you effortlessly and grows your audience with ease.

That “it” factor, what your known for, is the foundation for your positioning.

It’s also the path to increase your profit and purpose.

Over the years I have seen so many people stop themselves from confidently staking their claim on what they want to be known for out of fear of getting put in a box.

The truth is, you can’t create a recognizable brand if you’re not known for something specific. And you can always pivot (just ask me or my girl Marie Forleo).

This episode is dedicated to helping you figure out a game plan for what you want to be known for and how you’ll share that secret sauce with the world.

Listen in to get these five specific ways to get clear on what you’re known for (and more!).

  1. [16:09] Clear messaging. Where do people start with you? Where are they at the beginning of the journey? This is a great place to start the conversation and create a lead magnet. Starting in the right place can lead subscribers down a path.
  2. [18:44] Talk about what you are known for a lot. Weave in these topics into everything that you do and always come back to it. Only talk about your area of expertise and to an audience that is a good fit.
  3. [22:05] Stick with it. You will never be known for something specific if you are constantly dabbling in a bunch of things. You can be passionate about a lot of things but narrow your business down.
  4. [23:42] Don’t be afraid to ask people to share with you what they think you are all about. Ask a couple customers or fans what you are best known for.
  5. [24:32] Consider putting together a framework, method, or blueprint that you can go back to as a foundation. This is probably something that will evolve over time. When you see people gravitating towards it, you know it’s your thing.

Alright, my friend, I hope you’ll take this info and run with it to position yourself for lasting success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 13, 2019
#266: The Little Known (Easier Than You Think) Copywriting Method That Boosts Conversions
30:01

Let’s be honest here. Writing copy can be hard, but it’s an important almost mandatory skill for new business people just starting out. In fact, I wrote all of my own copy my first few years of business, and I suggest that you do the same. Become a student of copywriting. The more you do it, the easier it will become. Today, I’m talking about a technique that will help you build up that oh-so-important relationship with your ideal avatar.

This technique is by Ry Schwartz an expert copywriter who writes a lot of my copy. He also teaches copywriting and my audience loves him. This method is called Coaching the Conversion. It's all about writing copy in a way that will resonate with your ideal customer avatar at a really high level and will meet them right where they're at. It will help them feel as though they know that you see them and you hear them.

I actually think it's important that you write your own copy for the first two years of your business. You need to truly understand your ideal customer. Writing copy for your ideal customer is an intimate experience. It really should begin with you. It will make you a better entrepreneur and a better communicator overall if you take the time to perfect your expertise.

After this episode, you will walk away with golden nuggets that will help you transform your next promotion. I even share one of my best converting ads and break it all down for you step-by-step.

Coaching the Conversion Method in 4 Steps

  1. [10:34] Shift your mindset about how you feel about being a copywriter. Look at copywriting as a means to coach your ideal customer through a transformation by using words that make them feel seen and heard.
  2. [13:47] Know your ideal customer avatar like you know your best friend. Sometimes you have to read between the lines and know-your-customer intimately. Clearly understand their pain points, desires, and what makes them tick.
  3. [17:42] Use their words. It's important that you reflect back to them what they are feeling and what they are saying. Keep a running list of words and phrases that they use. These are pure gold for copywriters.
  4. [19:24] Remember that coaching the conversion walks your potential customer along the path from where they are now to where they could be or where they want to be. The first part of the path is your weekly content then you move on to coaching opportunities inside a webinar. Then send post follow-up emails.

A Concrete Example from One of My Highest Converting Facebook Ads:

How long have you been waiting to finally have the confidence to go all in on building and selling your digital course? Six months a year more. It took me a while to get started to.

I was scared I'd fail, and guess what? I pretty much did. My first course only made me $267, but I stuck with it and 7 courses, 42,000 students, and 8.7 million dollars in revenue later. I've learned a thing or two, and I want to share all that with you. Register for free here (and then I give the link).

 

 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 06, 2019
#265: What to Do When Your Life (and Biz) Are Out of Balance with Sheri Salata
42:42

Any Oprah fans out there? If you are a diehard Oprah fan like me, then you probably watched Season 25 of Oprah Behind the Scenes, and you probably remember Executive Producer Sheri Salata. She was also co-president of Harpo studios and OWN. I remember watching a scene from that special that showed Sheri waking up in the morning with her bulldogs getting ready to go to the Oprah show, and I thought how does she do it all?

It turns out Sheri has a fascinating story. She had reached the heights of her business career when she decided to reinvent herself and find more balance in her life. She woke up and realized that a career of her dreams wasn’t enough. She set out to reinvent herself with a job and life that are one and live her life to the fullest.

If you have ever felt stuck or in a rut, you will love Sheri’s story of reinvention and using happy as a compass. Sheri is the author of The Beautiful No, the owner of The Pillar Life, and co-host of The Sheri + Nancy Show. This is a powerful episode as Sheri shares her wit and wisdom in a way that only a true storyteller like Sheri can.

  • [08:16] Sheri shares what her life was like as executive producer for Oprah before day one of life after Oprah.
  • [11:13] Sheri had a great story for her book. She started in an entry level position for Oprah at the age of 35. This was the 3rd or 4th time she started over, and she reinvented herself again at age 56.
  • [13:58] You don't know your in a rut until you're out of it. Forcing yourself to jump the track and breathe new air makes life more interesting.
  • [16:28] Sheri had a dream come true career but not a dream come true life. She had to do a serious reckoning with the tenderness of hearts to get to the core of the kind of life she dreamed of.
  • [19:44] At a Shamanic ceremony in the desert, Sheri learned that to start with a fresh page you have to let go and clear the slate.
  • [24:05] Sheri and Nancy built a business around living and doing things for a better life and then reporting back about it.
  • [28:01] Sheri switched her story about working out. She is a storyteller, so she told herself a new story that inspired her using words like power, flexibility, renewal, and recovery.
  • [30:55] Awareness is everything. How not to make misery your compass. When happiness is your compass, you are keenly aware of what feels good. These are clues that your destination is lovely and wonderful.
  • [36:58] The amazing story of how Sheri landed her job at Oprah. You don't want to miss this story! It's also the basis for the title of her book</